1 1 % n i u 
 
 F COXGfiESS. S 
 
 n 
 
 (Sljap. "PC R i 03 
 
 fuXITED STATES OF AMERICA. | 
 
 
THE GENIUS 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 By H. HOLT. 
 
 Qui cupit optatam cursu contingere inetam 
 Multa tulit fecitque puer, sudavit, et alsit. 
 
 THIRD EDITION. 
 
 LONDON: 
 E. T. WHITFIELD, 2, ESSEX-STREET, STRAND. 
 
 1851. 
 

 -v£z>\d\ 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 RICHARD KINDER, PRINTER, 
 
 GREEN ARBOUR COURT, OLD BAILEY. 
 
v> 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 It had long been considered vain to attempt, in 
 this country, to teach the French language with 
 purity of accent and idiom, and children have been, 
 and are even now, frequently sent to France, for the 
 sole purpose of learning to speak French. As long, 
 indeed, as the student is confined to a knowledge 
 only of the mechanism of the language — as long as 
 grammars, encumbered with conjugations of verbs, 
 useless rules, and pompous sentences, continue to 
 multiply difficulties instead of removing them — such 
 a step may be necessary; but if the student be 
 taught that all the verbs, both regular and irregular, 
 of the language, may be learnt in a few hours — that 
 its mechanism, being similar to that of our own, may 
 be acquired in a space of time almost a,s brief — and 
 that all his attention should be directed to the pecu- 
 liarities, to the idiom, to the genius of the language, 
 in fine, to all those expressions which, not bearing 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 literal translation, form the principal difficulty of 
 conversation ; if, at the same time, he be taught to 
 compose themes and versions, not of the sublime, 
 but of the colloquial style, — he will soon acquire 
 fluency of speech, and, under a good master, purity 
 of accent, and the necessity of making aliens of 
 our children will no longer exist. 
 
 The design of this little book is to supply the 
 spirit of the language, by introducing the learner to 
 all the idioms in common use, exemplified in easy 
 and colloquial phrases. 
 
 Tables have been added to this edition, by means 
 of which a mere child may^in a few hours, learn 
 to conjugate all the verbs in the language. 
 
 Many of the author's friends having requested 
 him to publish a Key to the Exercises, he has com- 
 plied with their request. He flatters himself, also, 
 that Foreigners, learning English through the me- 
 dium of the French, will, by using the Key, become 
 familiar with the English Idiom, and thereby over- 
 come their chief obstacle in acquiring a fluency of 
 conversation. 
 
THE GENIUS 
 
 FKENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 Numbers refer to the Rules. 
 
 English words within brackets are not to be translated. 
 
 Words in Italics are idioms the French of which will be found in the Index, 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To ail or be the matter with Avoir. 
 
 To be thirsty or dry Avoir soif. 
 
 To be hungry Avoir faim. 
 To be cold, (meaning to feel cold) Avoir froid. 
 
 To be warm or hot, ( ,, ) Avoir chaud. 
 
 To be right Avoir raison de. 
 
 To be wrong Avoir tort de. 
 
 To be sleepy Avoir sommeil. 
 
 EXERCISE L 
 
 What 5 ails 
 
 you 
 
 ? I do not know what 136 is the 
 matter with me. I am thirsty. I am hungry. I 
 am cold. I am hot. You are right. He is wrong. 
 There is nothing the matter with me. Who 5 is 
 
 B 
 
2 EXERCISES* 
 
 cold ? Are 1 you warm ? Am I not 4 right ? Are 
 you not 4 wrong ? What 5 is the matter with him ? 
 He is too cold. He is too hot. Was not I 4 right ? 
 I am not wrong. What 5 is the matter with your 
 mamma ? I am not so hungry as I was just now ; 
 
 tout-a-Vheure ; 
 but I am very* thirsty. I am not cold, on the 
 
 a 
 contrary, I am very warm. You were right. I was 
 wrong. One is cold, even by the fire-side. I am so 
 
 au coin dufeu 
 cold that I cannot write. What 5 ails 2 the boy? 
 Are you thirsty? We are hungry. I am very cold. 
 I was very hot yesterday. I am too warm. Is he 
 not wrong ? 4 He is always thirsty. You are al- 
 ways hungry. Your brother is hungry. I am not 
 so hungry now. Drink if you are thirsty. I am 
 sure 13 you are cold. I shall be cold, if I do not 
 put on my great coat. If you are cold, warm your- 
 self. Your papa did not go 39 out yesterday, what 5 
 was the matter with him ? You 9 should eat only 149 
 when you are hungry, and drink only when you are 
 
 ni inf. 
 thirsty. I am so cold that I cannot hold my pen. 
 I should 1 * be surprised if you were warm, so far 
 
 que imp. subj. 
 from the fire. Do you see that I am right, and 
 that it is you who are wrong ? [If one were] to 
 believe you, every one is wrong except yourself. 
 
 tout-le monde 
 You are always ill ; what is the matter with you ? 
 What 5 is the matter with your dog ? My feet are so 
 cold ! I am very sleepy. Are you sleepy ? I am no 
 longer sleepy now. 
 
 * Very, before chaudffroidffaimysoif, is expressed by grand 
 or by the adverb Lien. 
 
EXERCISES. 6 
 
 Are your hands cold ? Only feel* how cold my 
 
 settlement 
 hands are. In winter we 9 are always hungry, and 
 in summer we are always thirsty. He is a man 
 who is always cold, when others are hot ; and who 
 is always hot, when others are cold. He must 7 have 
 been very hungry tof have eaten a whole loaf. Some- 
 thing must 7 be the matter with that dog, I never 
 see it eating. 24 You must 7 indeed be very cold if 
 they 9 never give you a fire. You do wrong to 
 
 de 
 suspect me. You are right in saying 24 that I am 
 warm ; I was 38 never so hot in my life. I wish 13 you 
 
 de je voudrais 
 
 were 17 [as] hot as I [am] . I am [as] cold as ice. 
 subj. 
 
 Why must 7 I be wrong ? Who 5 told you 13 you 
 were right ? If you were [as] hungry as (I am), 
 
 moi 
 you would not be so dainty. What is the matter 
 with your mamma, that she does not come to see 
 us ? There is nothing the matter with her. 
 
 One must 7 be very cold in your country. If you 
 had said quite 67 the contrary, you would have been 
 right. You cannot 159 imagine how hungry I was. 
 
 savoir 
 I hope you will not be so hungry another time. 
 What 5 was the matter with you the other evening ? 
 A fop addressing himself to a man who was 10 
 petit maitre 
 
 being led to prison, asked him what was the matter 
 en ce que 
 
 * Adv r erbs are usually placed after the verb, 
 f To, signifying in order to, is expressed by pour. 
 B 2 
 
4j EXERCISES. 
 
 with him; (the matter with me), replied the man, 
 
 ce que fai c' 
 
 is that my hands [are] tied, or I would 
 
 f ai les (sans cela) 
 
 teach you not 158 to insult the unfortunate. The 
 
 a a 
 
 best thing 13 you can 21 eat when you are thirsty, is 
 a pear ; whence no doubt, comes the French pro- 
 verb " To lay by for a rainy day." I am as hun- 
 
 Garder une poire pour la soif une 
 
 gry (as a wolf). We 9 eat before we are hungry, 
 
 canine 
 and 150 drink before 20 we are thirsty. In the first 
 ages of the world, they 9 ate only 149 when they were 
 hungry, and drank only when they 9 were thirsty. 
 The strongest is always right, the weakest is always 
 wrong. I was so sleepy last night, that I went to 
 bed at eight o' clock. 
 
 (It is of no use for you to) preach to us what 
 vous avez beau 
 was 10 done before the deluge ; I have seen you, your- 
 self, eat as [much as] four [people] , and that after 
 having had a good dinner. I am not so cold now 
 as I was a short time ago. Since you are so cold, 
 
 tout-a-Vheure 
 why do you not come nearer the fire? I am cold 
 
 s'approcher .de 
 even by the fire-side, and I am always warm even 
 in the middle of winter. You must 7 always be 
 right, and I must 7 always be wrong. I am sure 13 a 
 blanket has been 10 taken off my bed. I was so cold 
 all night that I could not sleep. Nor I neither, I 
 
 non plus 
 could not sleep ; but it was because I was too warm, 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 yet I am sure 13 I have not more blankets than you. 
 You are right in saying I lose by that bargain ; I 
 lose more than three pounds by it. I am so sleepy 
 
 de y 
 
 that I must go to bed. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To take care of Avoir soin de. 
 
 To take care (meaning to beware) Prendre garde de. 
 
 To look (neuter) Avoir Fair. 
 
 To look as if, or like, or to be likely to Avoir Vair de. 
 
 rp . , ( Se qarder bien de or 
 
 lo take care not to < , u . j , 
 
 \ n avoir garde de. 
 
 To want or to stand in need of Avoir besom de. 
 
 To intend, or to have an intention to Avoir dessein de. 
 
 To have reason to Avoir sujet de. 
 
 To be in the habit of Avoir coutume de. 
 
 To have a mind, or desire to Avoir envie de. 
 
 Obs. — When avoir Vair has the name of an inanimate 
 object for its nominative case, the adjective that follows 
 agrees with the nominative, but when it is the name of a 
 person, the adjective agrees in the masculine with air, as: 
 She looks unhappy. Elle a Vair malheureux. That pear looks 
 ripe. Cette poire a Vair mure. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 How unhappy she looks. She looks very con- 
 tented. You look very ill, what 5 is the matter with 
 you ? He looks like a thief. Your sister looks very 
 unhappy. Those apples look too ripe. He looked 
 so pale ! If you put on that coat, you will look like 
 a coachman. You are right, I will not put it on. 
 You would do wrong to put it on, I assure you. 
 Take care to come. You do not take care of your 
 clothes. That woman looks unhappy. That pear 
 looks too ripe. Do not look so sad. Take care to 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 put my letter into the post. Does 4 he not look like 
 
 a 
 a sailor ? Do 3 I look pale ? You will take care of 
 my watch, will you 4 not ? I want you. Do you 
 want 1 any money ? I shall want that bye-and-bye. 
 
 tout-a-Vheure 
 
 1 did 38 not intend to offend you. I have no inten- 
 tion to go thither. I have reason to be dissatisfied 
 with you ; but you have no reason to be dissatis- 
 
 de 
 iied with me. He is 31 taking his chocolate, 
 
 ce 
 which he is in the habit of doing every day at this 
 hour. 
 
 I have a great mind to speak to him. Have 1 you 
 a mind to see him ? Your mamma wants you. We 
 stand in need of your assistance. When 25 I want 
 you, I will send for you. You will have reason to 
 be satisfied with me. He is in the habit of doing 
 that every day. I have a great mind to play him 
 that trick. Do 3 you intend to rob me ? I am not 
 in want of money. You shall have no reason to 
 complain of 14 it. I never intended to offend him. 
 He shall have reason to repent it. I am not in the 
 habit of telling falsehoods. He must 7 intend to 
 injure you. I have a great mind to tell him so. 
 Keep your money, I do not want it. 14 The things 23 
 we are most in want of are cheap. I cannot 
 
 a bon marche 
 lend you the money 23 you want. I will take care 
 not to tell him what you said. Take care not to 
 believe it. I will take care not to tell him what 
 I think. Do you think I look like a schoolmaster ? 
 
EXERCISES. V 
 
 Does 4 he not look like a rake ? You must 7 have 
 a great desire to ruin yourself. He has no intention 
 to deceive you. I have no desire to go thither. 
 Did he not 4 look like a Jew ? You must 7 take good 
 
 Men 
 care not to believe all you 10 are told. Take care of 
 your health. I will take care of you. Take care. 
 You look very pale this morning, are 3 you ill ? He 
 looks like a ghost. He looks as if he wanted to 
 fight. Take care not to speak to him about my 
 marriage. I had no intention to offend him. You 
 will have reason to repent your follies. He is in 
 the habit of smoking a cigar every day after dinner. 
 
 I have a great mind to go and 15 see him. How 37 
 pale you look ! You look as if you had sat up all 
 
 veiller 
 night. He looked like a servant. He took care not 
 to tell me that. I do not w T ant any money now, but 
 I shall want some soon. Why do you ask me for 
 money, if you do not want any ? 105 You have not 
 the books 23 I want. He does not intend to do it. 
 He had no reason to rejoice at 14 it. It seems that 
 you are in the habit of telling falsehoods. I have 
 not the least desire to go and 15 see your uncle ; he 
 always looks sad and thoughtful. How 37 [very] 
 
 reveur 
 unhappy that woman looks ! She wants nothing. 
 If you want me, come to my house this evening about 
 six o' clock. Do you know why I look so sad ? Be- 
 cause I want my dinner. I have reason to be dis- 
 satisfied with my situation. It is my intention to 
 leave it as soon as I can. 25 I will take care not to 
 leave it before I have found another. You look to 
 me as if you fared well. 
 
b EXERCISES. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To have to do with Avoir de commun avec. 
 
 To have to deal with Avoir affaire a. 
 
 To be afraid Avoir peur. 
 
 To be agreeable to L* avoir pour agreable. 
 
 To have courage Avoir du cceur 
 
 To have a hand, or take a part in Avoir part a. 
 
 To ache, or have a pain in Avoir mal a. 
 
 To be ashamed Avoir horde de. 
 
 To have on one's hands Avoir sur les bras. 
 
 To have at one's disposal, or to ) A . 
 
 t, „„ • „• m r ' > Avoir en mam. 
 
 nave in view J 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 If it be agreeable to you, we will go out. If it be 
 agreeable to the gentleman, we will take a hand at 
 
 /aire une partie de 
 cards. Whom 6 have you to do with then ? I am 
 afraid 13 I have 16 to do with rogues. What 5 have 
 riches to do with happiness ? What 5 have politics to 
 
 do with religion ? Are 3 you afraid of him ? On 
 the contrary, it is he 100 who is afraid of me. When 
 we 9 have to do with robbers, we must expect to 
 be robbed. What 5 has your discourse to do with 
 what I have just said ? I am afraid of catching cold. 
 What 6 are you afraid of ? I am not afraid of you. 
 You do right not to have to do with those people. 
 You are very wrong to be afraid of that dog, he will 
 not bite you. Do not be afraid. Why are you 
 afraid ? If you have to deal with rogues you will be 
 cheated. What 5 have your suspicions to do with 
 what I have said ? 
 
 He does not know whom 6 he has to do with. His 
 
EXERCISES. 9 
 
 marriage has nothing to do with our affairs. I have 
 so great a pain in my knee that I can scarcely walk. 
 Are you not ashamed of your conduct ? Some cou- 
 rage (is required) for that enterprise, and you have 
 
 ilfaut 
 none. I will have no hand in it. 14 I am ashamed 
 to tell you so. You have no courage. If you have 
 the head-ache, the best thing 13 you can do 21 is to go 
 to bed. Man has always something the matter with 
 
 mat 
 him. My head aches. My feet ache. My back 
 aches. My teeth ache. I have a pain in my side. I 
 have sore eyes. My feet are cold. My hands are 
 cold. I confess 13 I had 38 some hand in it. 14 Is it 
 possible that you have 19 [any] dealings with those 
 scoundrels ? You have no courage, I would not have 
 to do with people who rob me ; you say you are 
 afraid of them, and, as you go on, you are likely to 
 be always afraid of them. They are not ashamed to 
 plunder you openly, and you are afraid to tell them 
 so. I will have no hand in the business 13 you 
 mention. I should be ashamed to be 10 seen in 
 (the company of) such vagabonds. 
 avec 
 
 Rashness has nothing to do with valour. Seeing 
 whom 6 I had to deal with, I resolved to confess every- 
 thing. I am afraid of (losing my way). If it be 
 
 s'egarer 
 agreeable to the ladies, we will stay here and 15 spend 
 the evening. If you had any courage, you would 
 not suffer yourself to be treated 10 so. I have often 
 had reason to repent the part 13 I took 38 in that busi- 
 ness. I have a pain in my right foot. If you have 
 a pain in your head, you had better go to bed. You 
 b 5 
 
10 EXERCISES, 
 
 ought really to be ashamed of your conduct I have 
 four poor little children on my hands. I have a good 
 deal of business in hand. I have in view a very 
 advantageous situation for you. It is impossible to 
 grow rich with a wife and three children upon my 
 hands. What 5 can riches have to do with happi- 
 ness ? I plainly perceived I had to do with a rogue. 
 
 They who are afraid of death, show that they have 
 not lived righteously.* Since it is agreeable to your 
 
 hien 
 papa, why should you oppose it ? That man has no 
 courage ; were it I, I would let every one see that I 
 am not (to be cheated). I lay 13 your bro- 
 
 homme a me laisser tromper 
 ther had a hand in it. 14 I have so severe a pain in 
 my head, 13 I cannot bear it. You always have the 
 tooth ache. If it were I, I would have 24 them all 
 drawn. You are wrong to be ashamed of a good 
 action. I have so much business upon my hands, 
 that I shall not be able to go and 15 see you for [a] 
 
 de 
 long time. He says he has a brilliant match in view 
 for his niece. I have several situations at my dis- 
 posal, you may (have your choice) . The fright 13 I 
 
 choisir 
 had, sufficiently punished me for the part I took in 
 
 de 
 that affair. I am afraid 13 you have 16 to do with a 
 man more cunning than yourself. 
 fi n 
 
 See note s page S. 
 
EXERCISES. 1 1 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 I can scarcely, or hardly Taidelapeinea. 
 
 There to be Y avoir. 
 
 To be (speaking of one's age) Avoir. 
 
 To be full, or covered with En avoir. 
 
 To act (meaning to give one's self the airs of) Faire. 
 
 To deal (at cards) Faire or donner. 
 
 To pretend to be, or to set up for Faire. 
 
 Fo be in vain for, or be of no use for Avoir beau. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 I can scarcely believe you. He could scarcely 
 believe that it was true. There is some truth in 
 what you say. How old is your sister ? She will 
 be fifteen [on] the seventeenth of next month. He 
 was full up to the throat. He had fallen into the 
 mud; he was covered with it up to his ears. I 
 acted 40 the lawyer in that piece. It is your turn to 
 deal. Whose 6 turn is it to deal ? It is my turn to 
 shuffle the cards, it is your turn to cut, and that gen- 
 tleman's turn to deal. What do you wish [to have] 
 for trumps ; for when I deal I turn up what I 
 d-tout retourne 
 
 like ; will you [have] hearts, spades, diamonds, or 
 vouloir 
 
 clubs ? Do you think 13 there is 19 a better man in 
 
 a 
 the world than he ? 100 He must 7 be at least eighty- 
 three.* Do you think 13 there is 19 any wickedness 
 in saying that ? 
 a 
 
 * The word ans, years, must always be expressed in French 
 when speaking of a person's age. 
 
12 EXERCISES. 
 
 It is in vain for me to tell him so, lie does not 
 believe me. It was of no use his crying out, no 155 
 one listened to him. It would be in vain for your 
 father to seek me ; it would be impossible for him to 
 find me. It is in vain for you to talk, you are wrong. 
 It is of no use for you to boast to me of your coun- 
 try, I love England better .* There has been a 
 deal of rain this year. Well ! I hope there will be 
 no more. It was in vain for them 9 to cry out to 
 him to stop : he was deaf, he did not hear [them] . 
 If you were full up to the throat, you would not be 
 satisfied. It is of no use his wishing for it, he shall 
 not have it. How old is your grandfather ? He is 
 seventy-nine. f I did not think he was so old. He 
 must 7 be at least seventy-three. It will be in vain 
 for you to look everywhere for it, you will not find it. 
 
 It is in vain for people to talk ; I do not think war 
 will be declared. How old were you then ? I was 
 twelve years old. There is company at our house 
 
 du monde 
 to-day. He came 38 to see me all over mud, he was 
 covered with it up to his eyes. Let me deal this 
 time. It is of no use my looking about on all sides, 
 I see nothing. I should hardly believe 13 he had 17 
 acted so foolishly. It is of no use for you to 
 
 unefolie pareille 
 try no persuade me, I know he is not a man to fall 
 blind-folded into the snares those villains have laid 41 
 tete-baissee 
 
 for him. He had been but a week gone, when I 
 received 39 a letter informing me of the sad news of 
 
 * See note, page 3. 
 
 f The word ans, years, must always be expressed in French 
 when speaking of a person's age. 
 
EXERCISES. 13 
 
 his death ; he was only twenty-two. In crossing a 
 field, I fell 38 into a ditch full of filth ; I was covered 
 with it up to my ears, and had 38 great difficulty to 
 get out of it. 14 How 37 well he knows how to act the 
 hypocrite ! Will 1 you have the kindness to deal, 
 sir ? Is it my turn to deal ? I thought it was yours. 
 It is in vain for you to entreat, I will not grant you 
 what you ask. I can scarcely believe my uncle is 
 gone to France, for he has often told me he would 
 
 en 
 never go there. Many people ruin themselves by 
 pretending to be gentlemen. He sets up for a great 
 wit. He sets up for a learned man, but he does not 
 know A from B. He is a man, / see, who well 
 
 ni A ni B. 
 knows how to act the hypocrite. What news is 
 there to-day ? There is no news. There will be a 
 ball at my aunt's [on] Friday ; are you invited ? 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To counterfeit, or to act Faire. 
 
 To go (a mile, &c.) Faire. 
 
 To get, or to have done Faire faire. 
 
 To burst out laughing Faire des eclats de rire. 
 
 To accustom one's self to Se faire a. 
 
 To turn, or to become Se faire. 
 
 To please, or to do a kindness to Faire plaisir a. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 Have you ever seen him counterfeit deafness? Guess 
 
 le sourd 
 how many miles I have been 42 to-day. Your mother 
 is going 31 to have 24 a house built at Greenwich. He 
 
14 EXERCISES. 
 
 burst 39 out a-laughing, when I told him 13 you were 
 going to be married. How can you accustom your- 
 self to such a life? I would willingly go twenty 
 miles* on foot to see that actor play; 35 he is [one] 
 at all the 74 most fashionable parties in London ; 
 de assemblee a 
 
 (every one is anxious to have him), he is such 
 
 c'est a qui Vaura 
 (good company). That is the way to get 24 liked. 
 
 rejouissant 
 You will get 24 scolded. I am not accustomed to his 
 ill-temper. After having listened to me to the end, 
 he burst 39 out a-laughing. I have a great mind to 
 turn soldier. You are so complaisant, that I am 
 sure you will do me that kindness. You have so 
 much patience, that you ought really to turn school- 
 master. 
 
 I have been three leagues this morning. Get 24 
 yourself bled. Have 24 your coat mended. Try to 
 accustom yourself to 14 it. He counterfeits lameness 
 
 le hoiteux 
 very well. I am going to have 24 a new gown made. 
 He has had 24 a house built at Paris. Have 24 that 
 meat roasted, do not have 24 it 14 boiled. Where do 3 
 you get 24 your clothes made ? Where do 3 you get 24 
 that done ? He has turned tailor. I advise you to 
 turn tailor. From [a] surgeon he became [a] baker. 
 You will get 24 yourseK hanged. He will get 24 him- 
 self put into prison. He pretends to be deaf : but he 
 hears all we are 31 saying. He will get 24 himself dis- 
 liked. Go and get 24 yourself killed, if you are tired 
 of life. A good girl gets 24 herself liked by every 
 
 de 
 body. I like to do a kindness to honest people. 
 That would please me greatly. He is going to turn 
 
EXERCISES. 15 
 
 watchmaker. I should like to accustom myself to 
 your way of living ; but I cannot. He went away 
 laughing heartily. Get 24 me two pairs of shoes 
 made^ and one pair of boots. Get 24 your hair cut, 
 you look like a hedge-hog. Carry this letter to the 
 post. I am sure 13 you will do me that kindness. I 
 cannot accustom myself to the climate of England. 
 I am going to have 24 feathers put on my bonnet. I 
 
 a 
 cannot go a step without his finding fault with it. 14 
 Get 24 a handle put to that saucepan. Have 24 a 
 border put to that gown. You must 7 get 24 bled. 
 I have told you more than [a] hundred times to 
 
 de 
 get 24 your coat mended. He pretends to be ill. 
 He has had 24 a room built (over) his kitchen. 
 
 au dessus de 
 I am going to have 24 irons put« on my boots* Guess 
 how many leagues I have walked 42 to-day. He 
 went 38 all the way on foot. Would you believe that 
 I walked fifteen miles this morning before break- 
 
 subj. 
 fast? 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be day-light Faire jour. 
 
 To be dark Faire nuit, or sombre. 
 
 To be hot (weather) Faire chaud. 
 
 To be cold „ Faire froid. 
 
 To be wet „ Faire humide. 
 
 To be muddy „ Faire crotte. 
 
 To be dirty „ Faire sale. 
 
 To be rainy „ Faire de la pluie. 
 
 To be bad „ Faire mauvais. 
 
 To be fine „ Faire beau. 
 
 To be sunny „ Faire du soliel. 
 
 To be foggy „ Faire du brouillard. 
 
16 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 It was very cold yesterday. It was very hot last 
 summer. Do not go into the park, it is very wet 
 there. It is dirty every where. It is very bad 
 weather, do not go out, wait until it be 20 fine. If 
 it were not so wet, I would go out. It begins to be 
 cold. Do you 1 think it will 19 be very cold this 
 winter ? It is colder in London than in Paris. It 
 is warmer in Italy than in France. It has been 
 very rainy weather lately. Do not go into the wood, 
 it is too wet there ; do not go the road way neither, 
 for it is too muddy. The weather has been so bad 
 lately that it is dirty everywhere. When it is 25 fine, 
 we will all go together. I will get up as soon 
 as it is 25 light. We will go thither as soon as it is 
 dark. 
 
 It is very foggy. It is colder to-day than 26 it was 
 yesterday. It was warmer yesterday than it is to- 
 day. If it be as cold as it is now, I will not go. 
 It is always foggy [in] November, in England. 
 
 au mois de 
 It is dreadful weather. When 3 is it day-light now ? 
 It is day-light now at half-past five. When 3 is it 
 day-light in your apartment ? It is abominable 
 weather, one ought never to go out without [an] 
 umbrella. There ! the sun is out, see how 37 fine 
 
 voila que 
 it is ! When the weather is so bad it is better to 
 stay at home. It is going to be fine, see how the 
 sun shines ! For climate, 45 I prefer France, 51 the 
 weather is always so unsettled in England. Do not 
 walk on the grass, it is too wet. Who would have 
 imagined it would 19 be so fine this afternoon ? It is 
 very cold, you had better not go out. It is going to 
 
EXERCISES. 17 
 
 be stormy. See, I was right, what nasty weather 
 
 vilain 
 it is ! It is not weather to turn a dog out. 
 
 mettre dehors 
 
 It is not day-light at four o' clock, or else I would 
 set out with you. "When it is so hot, I prefer tra- 
 velling by night. Yet it is always damp during the 
 night. It is damp, 'tis true, but not cold. If it 
 were not so muddy, I would walk all the way. It is 
 not dirty in the road, but we should 8 be obliged 
 to go through the forest. Not a day passes, 
 but it rains ; and how 37 pleasant it is, is it not, to 
 qu y il ne subj. 
 be wet to the skin ? If it be bad weather, I will 
 
 jusqu'aux os 
 not go. Oh ! I am sure 13 it will be fine. The sun 
 must 7 be out, in order to see what o'clock it is by 
 
 a 
 the sun-dial. How 37 soon it is dark now ! I think 
 you would have some difficulty yourself to explain 
 (the drift of) your argument ; we need not be told 
 
 ou aboutit discours 
 
 that when it is cold, it is not hot ; and that when it 
 is hot, it is not cold. It will be night before he is 20 
 ready, he is so long (decking himself out). It is 
 
 a s'adoniser 
 sometimes so foggy in London, that people 9 cannot 
 see one another (in the middle of the day). In Eng- 
 
 en plein midi 
 land it often thunders, lightens, hails, rains, blows, 
 snows, and shines, in one [and the] same day. It 
 is impossible the weather should please 18 every body; 
 
 a 
 
18 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 washer- women would wish it always to be fine, whilst 
 
 que subj. 
 
 hackney-coachmen would wish it always to rain. 17 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To get, or become acquainted Faire connaissance. 
 
 To send for Faire venir, or envoy er chercher. 
 
 To take out (a stain) Faire en aller. 
 
 To cook (n.)* Faire la cuisine. 
 
 To manage so that Faire en sorte que (subj.) 
 
 To do nothing but Ne faire que. 
 
 To have but just Ne faire que de. 
 
 To pay attention Faire attention. 
 
 To be a bankrupt Faire banqueroute. 
 
 To produce, or give rise to Faire naitre. 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 I became 39 acquainted, in that village, with a 
 very amiable gentleman. Send for the doctor. 
 Manage so that he may not perceive it. 14 You do 
 
 subj. 
 nothing but talk. How is it possible you should 
 know 19 your lesson ? you do nothing but play and 
 prattle all the morning. Send him that sum, but 
 manage so that he may not know the name of the 
 
 subj. 
 person who has sent 41 it 14 to him. Why did you 
 send for me ? I will send for your brother, if you 
 like. I can cook and wash, said the girl, and [do] 
 all the work of the house. I had 10 been sent for 
 from Amiens to be a porter. Where 3 did 38 you two 
 become acquainted? Your papa is but just gone 
 
 * The active verb to cook } is faire cuke. 
 
EXERCISES. 19 
 
 out. Pay attention to what I am 31 saying to you. 
 He does nothing but amuse himself all day. 
 
 I have but just told you so. I will pay more atten- 
 tion another time. If you do not pay more attention 
 to what I say to you, I will send for your master. 
 It was there 13 we became 39 acquainted. You will 
 never be able to get that stain out. He has done 
 nothing but play all the week. I have but just 
 dined. If you manage so that he does not perceive* 
 
 subj. 
 the trick that is being 31 played upon him, he will 
 not have the least suspicion of it. 14 Does 3 she 
 know how to cook ? It was at your house that I 
 became 39 acquainted with that gentleman. They 9 
 do nothing but eat and drink on Christmas-day in 
 England. I will pay attention to it. 14 Do you see 
 what attention he pays to it ? 14 He does not pay 
 the least attention to what you are saying 31 to him. 
 Try to become acquainted with that gentleman, he 
 may be able to serve you. You do nothing but talk 
 about that gentleman. Since I have been here, I 
 
 pres. ind. 
 have got acquainted with a number of people. If 
 they 9 cannot do without my evidence, they 9 must 7 
 send for me from Paris. 
 
 I have just the thing for you ; this will take out 
 all those stains. I advise you to marry a woman 
 who knows how to cook. We will manage so that 
 subj. 
 
 * Obs.— To perceive, used figuratively, must always be 
 expressed by s'apercevoir, and not apercevoir. 
 
20 EXERCISES. 
 
 he shall know nothing about it. 14 When people 9 
 
 subj* 
 do nothing but drink, how do you think they 
 can 19 be well ? Your brother has but just returned 
 home, how would you have him know 19 what 
 has taken place? Will you pay attention, sir, 
 (here am I toiling) to explain the rule to 
 
 ne voila-t-il pas que je me tue 
 
 him, and he does not pay the least attention to it. 14 
 Has not 4 your father been a bankrupt ? That will 
 give rise to suspicion. Do you remember where we 
 
 plural 
 became 39 acquainted? Why do you not send for 
 the doctor, since you are so ill ? It will 22 be in vain 
 for you to try ; you will never be able to get out that 
 stain. What used* you to do in your last place ? 
 I used 40 to cook and wash. Manage so that your 
 father may set out an hour before day-light. Your 
 
 subj. 
 brother did nothing but laugh during the sermon. 
 We have but just dined ; why did you not come 38 
 sooner? I did 38 not pay attention to what you 
 said; 40 I thought 40 it was at five o'clock you dined. 40 
 He will be a bankrupt before long. What 5 can 
 
 qutil soit pen 
 have produced the hatred he has against him ? That 
 preference has given rise to much jealousy, and will 
 stilL They have just cooked me a partridge, but I 
 have no appetite. The simple countryman did no- 
 thing but laugh during the whole time the play 
 lasted. 32 It is often the men who cook in France. 
 I have just sent for a French cook from Paris. 
 
 * Obs. — The word used before another verb, is generally 
 but a sign of the imperfect tense. 
 
EXERCISES. 21 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be shipwrecked Faire naufrage. 
 
 To turn the conversation Faire tornber la conversation. 
 
 To ask questions Faire des questions a. 
 
 To frighten Faire peur a. 
 
 To be the delight of Faire les delices de. 
 
 To hurt, or to do harm to Faire mat a. 
 
 It hurts me to II me fait de la peine de. 
 
 To get, or procure for Faire avoir a. 
 
 To let know Faire savoir a. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 Do not hurt the cat. Do not frighten the chil- 
 dren. He has been shipwrecked. I turned the con- 
 versation to poetry. You ought not to frighten 
 
 sur 
 children. He was the delight of his master. You 
 frighten me. That frightens him. The least thing 
 frightens him. You hurt me. That will not do you 
 any harm. I will not hurt you. Hurt nobody. 
 You hurt my leg. He always asks me questions 
 which 6 I cannot answer. That hurts my eyes. He 
 turned the conversation to commerce. Who 5 has 
 been hurting 31 that child ? He has hurt my heel. 
 He must 7 have hurt him. Poverty frightens him. 
 That is not what frightens me. Why do you ask 
 me so many questions ? It hurts me to see 35 that 
 child cry so. Who has been hurting him ? It is 
 not I 100 who have been 31 hurting him. Turn the 
 conversation, if you can, on the new ministry. It 
 hurts him to see his aged father obliged to work. 
 You must have hurt that child, or he would not 
 
 ou Men 
 cry so. Provided you do not hurt 20 me, you may 
 do it. 14 That man has been shipwrecked three 
 
22 EXERCISES. 
 
 several times. Several 152 vessels have been wrecked 
 different 
 
 on that coast. iEneas was 39 shipwrecked on the 
 coast of Africa. I will endeavour to turn the conver- 
 sation on the conduct of the late ministry. Why do 
 you ask me that question? What 5 is it that frightens 
 you? Holy writ is our dearest delight. What harm 
 would that do you ? It hurts me to tell him that 
 
 apprendre 
 news. He has promised to get that situation for 
 me. Let me know where you move to. Moderation 
 is the delight of the wise man, excess is that of the 
 imprudent. It is 18 rare that one is shipwrecked 
 more than once in one's life-time. Telemachus was 39 
 
 de 
 shipwrecked several times. By turning the conver- 
 sation on war, we stall be able to discover what his 
 sentiments are. If you 10 are asked any questions, 
 answer only yes, or no. Let not their threats 
 frighten you. My children are my dearest delight. 
 The cane hurts. You cannot conceive how it hurt 40 
 me to see the good old man mourning [over] his son. 
 If you can get me that situation, I will give you two 
 hundred pounds sterling. Don't, you hurt me. 
 laissez done 
 
 You will have the goodness to let me know where 
 you are going to live. If you go by sea, you run 
 the risk of being shipwrecked. That is the only 
 thing that 21 frightens me. Just* tell me, what 
 
 un pen 
 harm would it do you to take a letter for me ? 
 V se charger de 
 
 * See note first, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 23 
 
 (The custom-house officers) are in the habit now of 
 
 les commis de la douane 
 searching every one, and I am afraid 13 they would 
 fouiller 
 
 make 16 me pay very dear [for] the pleasure 13 I 
 should have in obliging you. If you do that, you 
 
 a 
 will frighten him. You will hurt her. She has 
 hurt herself. If you hurt me, I will cry out. Our 
 vessel frightened 39 the inhabitants. We told 40 them 
 we did 40 not intend to hurt them, but they were 
 afraid to come on board. It hurt me to see them 
 so ill-used. We were nearly 29 wrecked on their 
 coast. What frightened them most was our fire- 
 arms, which made us pass among them for superior 
 beings. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To put to death Faire monrir. 
 
 To send word to Faire dire a. 
 
 To acquaint with Faire part de. 
 
 To shame, or to make ashamed Faire honte a. 
 
 To excite the envy of Faire envie a. 
 
 To have made Faire faire. 
 
 To fry, roast, boil, &c. Faire frire rotir, bouitter, fyc, 
 
 To look sulky, or to sulk Faire la mine. 
 
 To excite the compassion of Faire pitie a. 
 
 To show, or to let see Faire voir a. 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 They put him to death, without giving him time 
 to say his prayers. Send word to your brother, to 
 come to London. He acquainted 39 me with his 
 good fortune. Your sister is more advanced 42 than 
 
24 EXERCISES. 
 
 you are; that ought to make you ashamed. His 
 promotion excites the envy of every one. I will 
 have 24 a new gown made. I will wait until I am 20 
 in London to have some clothes made. You may 
 a 
 
 put me to death, but I will not betray my friend. 
 Let him know that I will not have him come to my 
 house again. I have sent him word so, but he pays 
 no attention to it. 14 I will have 24 my clothes made 
 by your tailor. Where do 3 you have 24 yours made ? 
 chez 
 I have 24 mine made at the tailor's who lives at the 
 
 chez 
 corner of your street. I will get that situation for 
 you. If I succeed, I will let you know. He has 
 sent me word that he will not come. I have ac- 
 quainted him with what you told me. If I get you 
 that situation, you must 8 give me a hundred 
 guineas. Have you sent him word to come? If 
 any one inquire [for] me, let me know. He has 
 had 24 two pairs of boots and one pair of shoes made. 
 I am going to have 24 some neckcloths made. I have 
 sent word to your father that I shall not go to the 
 ball. Tell the cook to fry that fish. Why do you 
 look so sulky at me ? That poor man excites the 
 compassion of every one. Show me what you have 
 [got] . You will 4 not show him what I have given 
 you, will you ? My sister has looked sulky at me 
 
 present ind. 
 these three days. Do not boil the meat too much. 
 depuis 
 
 If you roast that meat, I will not eat a morsel of 
 it. 14 Did 38 you see how cross he looked at me ? 
 That shows he intends to deceive you. I will let 
 him see that I am not to be insulted 10 with im- 
 punity. You had promised to show me your last 
 
EXERCISES. 25 
 
 letter. He showed 39 my letter to all his friends. 
 He will sulk for a week, if you do not give him 
 what he asks. 
 
 They 9 put 39 him to death in the most cruel tor- 
 ments. Send him word that he is expected. 10 He 
 would not acquaint me with the news 13 he had re- 
 ceived. 41 Will 3 nothing shame you ? His immense 
 riches excited 40 the envy of all his fellow-citizens. I 
 have had 24 three new* gowns made this week. I 
 had told the cook to fry that meat, instead of that 
 she has boiled it. 14 I had rather 13 she had roasted 17 
 it, than boiled it. (Is not that) a fine cause for 
 
 ne voila-t-il pas 
 sulking ? That wretched man excites the compas- 
 sion of all the passengers. Let me see what you 
 have found. I will show it you by-and-bye. I had 
 rather 1 * 1 be put 10 to death than 26 be imprisoned for 
 life. Send him word that I want to see him before 
 he sets 20 out. You have put my two brothers and 
 my father to death, and you would have put me to 
 death too, if you could have caught me. You must 
 send him word so. 73 He will acquaint me with it, 14 
 I am sure. Do you 18 think 13 that will make him 
 ashamed ? Since he excites your envy, why do you 
 not try to be as virtuous as (he is) ? Do you know 
 
 lui 
 that I am going to have 24 a new gown made ? mamma 
 has already bespoken 41 it. I wish 20 to have 24 two 
 soles boiled for my dinner; what [a] pity ! I have 
 told the cook to fry them. I am surprised 13 you 
 a 
 
 * Obs. — Nenf means new ; nouveau, before its substantive, 
 means fresh ; and after, new-fashioned. 
 C 
 
26 EXERCISES. 
 
 did 17 not tell her to roast them; you are so fond (of 
 
 a 
 being contrary). Do not be sulky for that, I will 
 
 contrarier 
 eat them fried. That man really excites my compas- 
 sion, he is always in [an] ill humour. Let me see 
 
 de 
 what you have in your hand. Why should I let you 
 see it ? it does not belong to you , Why send me 
 word that you would come ? Why should I ac- 
 quaint him with my misfortunes ? 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To value or esteem, or to set) ^ . ■, 
 
 , ' > Faire cas de. 
 
 value on J 
 
 To pretend to Faire semblant de. 
 
 To evince Faire par aitre. 
 
 To have no occasion for N* avoir que faire de. 
 
 To be all over with Eire fait de. 
 
 w L ., ( Faire voile, or mettre 
 
 Tosetsai1 \ a la voile. 
 
 To sustain a loss Faire une perte. 
 
 To reproach Faire des reproches a. 
 
 To fall upon, meaning to kill, or j Fake ^ bme ^ 
 
 take away J 
 
 ' Se faire gloire de, or 
 
 Se faire honneur de. 
 
 rr, , . ( Se faire gloire de. or 
 
 To glory m < ~ v 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 Your papa sets a great value on that picture. Pre- 
 tend not to hear him. Is that the fine ring 13 you 
 value so much ? It is all over with me. We set 39 
 sail on the 18th of August, 1851. I have no occa- 
 sion for your money. That is the value he sets on 
 
EXERCISES. 27 
 
 your friendship. He pretends not to know any- 
 thing about it. 14 Pretend to believe whatever he 
 tells vou. He evinces great zeal in your affairs. I 
 have no occasion for your advice. The wind being 
 favourable, we set 39 sail, without thinking* of the 
 
 a 
 duke, who was gone to visit one of his relations. 
 That plainly shows the little esteem 13 you had for 
 
 Men 
 him. It was all over with him, his enemies were at 
 his (heels). It had been all over with me, if you 
 
 troussez c'eut 
 had not come to my assistance. He evinces great 
 friendship for you. I have no occasion for that. Is 
 that the value you set on the presents that are 
 made 10 to you ? It is not a great loss that you have 
 sustained, 41 I hope. He has reproached me for it. 14 
 The creditors fell 39 upon every thing there was in the 
 room. He glories in his vices. He has sustained 
 considerable losses. You are always reproach- 
 ing 31 me. Many young men, instead of* being 
 ashamed of their vices, glory in them, and do not 
 
 (scruple to) acknowledge them. The loss we 
 sefaire scrupule de 
 
 have just sustained is not very considerable. Did 38 
 you come on purpose to reproach me ? They fell 39 
 upon all the inhabitants without mercy. He glories 
 in* having succeeded in* cheating the old man. 
 
 a 
 Young people often glory in their vices, and are 
 ashamed of virtue. It is reproaching me, to be con- 
 
 que 
 tinually putting me in mind of the kindnesses with 
 
 * Every preposition, except the preposition en, governs 
 the following verb in the infinitive mood. 
 
 c2 
 
28 EXERCISES. 
 
 which you have loaded 41 me. The loss you have 
 sustained 41 must 7 be very great, for you to grieve as 
 you do. You must not reproach me for it. 14 You 
 must set a great value, indeed, upon my presents, 
 to give them away to such people. If he pretend 
 
 pour 
 not to understand you, do not spare him ; tell him 
 
 menager 
 all you know about it. 14 
 
 If he evince any disposition to serve you, be 
 assured he will not disappoint you. I have no occa- 
 sion for [any] of these things, you may take them all 
 away. It will be all over with you, if it be 10 known 
 that you are here. If the wind be favourable to- 
 morrow, we shall set sail without delay. The loss 
 he has sustained 41 makes him sad. Was it to re- 
 proach me that you sent for me ? You ought to set 
 more value on your books, as it was your papa who 
 gave 38 them to you. He pretended 13 he did not 
 know me. The friendship 13 he evinced for your 
 brother, proves him to be a man who easily forgets 
 the injuries that have 10 been done 41 him. I have 
 no occasion for your books, you may take them back. 
 It was all over with him, when the death of his 
 uncle put 39 him in (ready money), and saved 39 him 
 
 enfonds 
 from the misfortunes (into which) his imprudence 
 
 ou 
 was about to plunge him. We set 39 sail [on] the 
 20th of August; we (were 40 bound) for St. Domingo, 
 
 aller a 
 
 where we arrived 39 safe and sound [on] the 3rd of 
 October. The loss you have sustained 41 is not irre- 
 parable. Why reproach me ? it was not my fault 
 
EXERCISES. 29 
 
 that you were 10 arrested; the greedy creditors, after 
 
 /aire saisir 
 having fallen upon all your property, caused 24 you 
 to be sought for every where, and now, far from 
 pitying your misfortunes, glory in having punished 
 a man who would not have scrupled, they say, to 
 ruin them all. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To scruple to Se faire scrupule de. 
 
 To be light, dark Faire jour, nuit. 
 
 To put an end to Faire cessir. 
 
 To deceive by falsehoods En faire accroire a. 
 
 To be conceited Se faire accroire. 
 
 To get rid of Se defaire de. 
 
 To treat with kindness Faire des amities a. 
 
 To keep Lent Faire careme. 
 
 To give satisfaction Faire raison. 
 
 To prosecute Faire son proces a. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 (There is) a man who would scruple to eat pork, 
 voila 
 and who would not scruple to rob his own father. 
 He scruples to tell him what he thinks of his con- 
 duct. It is day-light now at six o' clock. I will go 
 to your house as soon as it is 25 dark. I will soon 
 put an end to that noise. He deceives you by false- 
 hoods. It is day-light in America, when it is night 
 in the East Indies. We get up as soon as it is light, 
 and go to bed as soon as it is dark. You want to 
 deceive me. Get rid of those prejudices. He is 
 very conceited. I have been treated 10 with great 
 kindness in that family. You ought to keep Lent, 
 
30 EXERCISES. 
 
 friend, you are too fat. You must 7 give me satis- 
 faction. He will 10 be prosecuted. He is a young 
 man who is very conceited. I have got rid of my 
 house. I soon got rid of him. Try and get rid of 
 that man, or else he will ruin you. If he be prose- 
 
 bien 
 cuted, 10 he will be fined. I am very glad 13 I have 
 got rid of him. He wanted* me to give him satis- 
 faction. He never keeps Lent. Have 1 you got rid 
 of your horse ? He always treats me with so much 
 kindness, that I cannot deceive him. He ought to 
 be prosecuted. 10 I should like much to get rid of 
 
 Men 
 that man. Treat him with kindness, and you will 
 see that he will soon consent to their marriage. I 
 do not know what is the matter with your brother 
 lately, he always treats me with kindness now. He 
 deceives you, there is no one he hates more than you. 
 
 subj. 
 If it were light at five o' clock, I would set out with 
 you. It is dark for six months at the north pole. 
 
 pendant arctique 
 
 I had 38 a great deal of trouble to put an end to that 
 contest. They 9 have been 31 trying to deceive you. 
 He is very conceited. Try to get rid of that bad 
 habit. After the kindness with which I have 10 been 
 treated, nothing will be able to induce me to forsake 
 him. 
 
 A man of a hot constitution ought to keep Lent 
 temperament 
 for ever. He shall give me satisfaction for it. 14 
 They 9 are going to prosecute him. You will do 
 
 * To want, signifying to wish, is not expressed by avoir 
 besoin, but by vouloir, followed by que and the subjunctive. 
 
EXERCISES. 31 
 
 well to get rid of that dog, he does nothing but bark 
 all night. I do not see why you should scruple to 
 dance, there is not so much harm in dancing, as in 
 reading novels. You are in bed two hours after it is 
 
 a 
 light, and yet you often go to bed before it is 20 dark. 
 It is time, I think, to put an end to your disputes. 
 It is not he that will deceive me. He is a conceited 
 coxcomb. I should have wished to get rid of him, 
 but I could 38 not. Nothing would have given me 
 greater pleasure than to get rid of that servant, 
 but it was not [an] easy thing; he would not go 
 away without [having] his wages [paid him], and I 
 was at that time short of money. But you were 
 
 not obliged, for that, to treat him with so much 
 kindness. He was a Catholic, and yet he would not 
 keep Lent, and all the year round, even [on] Good 
 Friday, he ate 40 meat, whilst myself and all my men 
 
 gens 
 abstained 40 from it. He will be obliged to' give you 
 satisfaction for his uncivil conduct. If he had been 10 
 
 de 
 prosecuted, he would have been 10 hanged; but I 
 would 38 never have him taken up, although 20 I could 
 have done so several times. I am much obliged to 
 you for having rid me of him. It was still light 
 when I met 38 you. It was (as dark as pitch) last 
 
 la nuit la plus sombre 
 night at nine o'clock. It was just day-light when I 
 awoke 38 this morning. 
 
32 EXERCISES. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To court, or to pay one's addresses to Faire la cour a. 
 
 To wrong Faire tort a. 
 
 To take a walk Faire un tour. 
 
 To get into trouble Se faire des affaires. 
 
 To shave one's self Se faire la barbe. 
 
 To fine Condamner a V amende. 
 
 To be able Eire en Stat de. 
 
 To be about Eire question de. 
 
 It respects, or it is about (imp.) // sagit de. 
 
 To set about S'y prendre. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 When we 9 are courting, we 9 have not time to 
 think of anything else. Wrong no one. Will you 
 come and 15 take a walk ? He will get into trouble. 
 Do you 3 shave yourself? You wrong me. I am 
 going to take a walk. He was shaving himself when 
 I entered. 38 You wrong your brother, he is an 
 honest man. He shaves himself before breakfast. 
 Go and 15 take a walk before dinner. I will* not 
 have you wrong his memory, he was a wise and 
 
 subj . q 
 
 virtuous man. You may* get into trouble, if you 
 say that. If I get into trouble, it will not be you 
 that will get me out. I must go and 15 take a walk, 
 for I am tired of staying by the fire-side. It is no 
 longer time to be courting at sixty. How have you 
 
 de 
 been 10 wronged ? I went 38 out to take a walk, but 
 it began 39 to rain, and I returned 38 home imme- 
 diately. 
 
 * Will and would, when independent verbs, are expressed 
 by vouloir ; should, by devoir; may, might, and could, by 
 pouvoir. 
 
EXERCISES. S3 
 
 I have got into fine trouble, by wishing to serve 
 
 en 
 you, and you alone can* get me out again. Itf is 
 very disagreeable to be obliged to shave one's self 
 every day. He will be fined, (that is) all, he will 
 
 voila 
 (get off) cheaply. Of what use is it (to apply) to 
 etre quitte s'adresse? % 
 
 me ? I am not able (to assist) you. Let us see, 
 
 servir 
 what 6 is it about ? When it respects doing any one 
 a service, no one is readier to make promises than 
 he, and no one less (punctual) in keeping them. I 
 
 fidele 
 will set about it another way. Do you not know 
 
 de 
 that your brother is paying 31 his addresses to my 
 cousin ? If I have wronged your brother, I beg his 
 pardon. Let us go and 15 take a walk in the park till 
 tea-time. Your cousin has got into fine trouble, by 
 the en 
 
 meddling with their disputes. If (I were not to shave) 
 
 de imp. ind. 
 
 myself for a week, I should look like an old hermit. 
 He must 7 have done something very bad, to % have 
 been so heavily fined. What will be 10 done to him, 
 if he be not able to pay ? 
 
 How you set about it ! I set about it my own 
 
 * See note in preceding page. 
 
 f When etre is followed by a substantive, use ce before it; 
 when by an adjective, use il. 
 % See note second, page 3. 
 c 5 
 
34 EXERCISES. 
 
 way. Is it a time to be courting, when we 9 have 
 one foot in the grave ? You wrong me. You wrong 
 yourself. They 9 say it is good for (one's) health, to 
 take a walk after supper. I am afraid of getting 
 into trouble. How would you have me shave my- 
 self ? I have neither soap nor razor. If I am only 
 fined, I shall not complain ; but I am 16 afraid 13 I 
 shall be imprisoned 10 for life. You are speaking 
 of education, sir ; that is not what we are [speaking] 
 about now ; it is respecting the actual state of France. 
 He will be fined. We are not able to go to war. 
 
 /aire 
 What 6 is it all about ? When it respects our own 
 interests^ we 9 are not idle. If I be fined, I shall not 
 be able to pay. Is that the way you set about it ? 
 When it respects doing a good action, he pretends 
 
 le sourd 
 (to be deaf). 
 
 I have been fined. I am not able to walk. I 
 would go with you, but I am afraid 16 they will talk 
 about money. Oh ! no, there will be nothing about 
 that. If it respects doing you a service, I will tell 
 you frankly, that I am not able to do it. If that is 
 (the way) 13 you set about it, you will never finish it. 
 comme cela 
 
 That is not the way to set about it. He is not able 
 to work. You set very awkwardly about it. As 
 soon as I am 25 able to go out, I will go and 15 see 
 you. I shall never be able to speak French. Your 
 father has got into fine trouble, by (trying) to set up 
 
 en vouloir 
 for [a] surgeon. If he had known how to set about 
 
EXERCISES. 35 
 
 it rightly, he would have succeeded, but I hope 13 
 they 9 will not fine him very heavily. 
 
 fort 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To give an account Rendre compte. 
 
 To lay it to, or to accuse of S'en pendre a. 
 
 To take after Tenir de. 
 
 To agree to whatever is proposed Passer par oil Von vent. 
 
 I grant it Ten demeure $ accord. 
 
 To aim, or to take aim at Coucher en joue. 
 
 To alight, or to dismount Mettre pied a terre. 
 
 To be amiss, or to go wrong Aller mal. 
 
 To be angry with En vouloir a. 
 
 To anticipate,or to go and meet Aller au-devant de. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 Give me an account of all 13 you have done. Why 
 do you lay it to me ? He takes after his father. 
 You must lay it to yourself, if you do not succeed. 
 You must give me an account of what you have done 
 with my money. He takes after his mother [in] 
 that. He lays his misfortunes to every body. I 
 
 de 
 gave 39 him an account of what I had done. He 
 accuses all his friends of the misfortunes which hap- 
 pened 42 to him. If he do not succeed, he will lay it 
 to you. He must 7 be mad to* lay it to me. Do 
 not lay your misfortunes to me. Come and 15 give 
 me an account of what you have done to-day. That 
 child takes very much after its father. He must 7 
 give mean account of his conduct. I was 8 obliged 
 to agree to whatever he proposed. That is true, I 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
36 EXERCISES. 
 
 grant it, but why lay it to me? He was aiming 
 at me. Scarcely had he alighted, when he came 39 
 
 que 
 and 15 embraced me. That is not amiss for you. 
 You are angry with me, I am sure, you look angry. 
 He anticipates my wishes. Let us go and meet him. 
 If it be my money 13 you are aiming at, you shall not 
 have it. He alighted 39 and came to speak to me. 
 You must 8 not be angry with me, it was not my 
 fault. If you see that any one aims at his fortune, 
 you must 8 give me notice of it. He was (quite) a 
 
 vrai 
 Jew, I was 8 obliged to agree to whatever he liked. 
 That ought (to be done), I grant it, but who will 
 
 sefaire 
 do it ? He agreed 38 to whatever I proposed. 38 Is 
 it her fortune 13 you are aiming at ? He alighted and 
 came towards me. That is not amiss for a little boy 
 like you. God forbid 13 I should be angry with you. 
 He is angry with everybody. You ought to antici- 
 pate her wishes. He will agree to whatever you 
 propose. I plainly see 13 you are angry with me. 
 Come, dismount, and come and 15 embrace me. You 
 must 8 not be angry with your sister ; she was wrong, 
 I grant, but she is sorry for what she has done, and 
 you ought to forgive her. 
 
 I am not angry with her ; on the contrary, it is she 
 that is angry with me. His affairs go wrong. Tell 
 us when you will come, and we will go and meet you. 
 I am not angry with him. You must 8 not be angry 
 with me for what I have done, I did not intend to 
 injure you. We must 7 all give an account of our 
 actions. When we 9 do not succeed, we 9 never lay it 
 to ourselves. He takes after the family ; but he 
 
EXERCISES. 37 
 
 takes, I think, a little more after his father than his 
 mother. What would you have me do, I want 
 
 subj. 
 money ; I must 7 agree to whatever he proposes. I 
 grant it ; but why let him see that you are so poor ? 
 It is easy to perceive that it is the lady's fortune 13 
 he is aiming at ; but I shall take care to (disappoint 
 
 tromper son 
 him). We alighted 39 and faced the robbers. I 
 attente 
 
 have not been a week from home, and I have already 
 got some ready money : that is not amiss, I think, 
 for a beginner. Oh ! how angry I am with him, for 
 [his] having written that letter ! I cannot stop a 
 minute, I must 7 go and meet my sister, who (is to) 
 
 devoir 
 arrive about ten o'clock. Come and 15 give me a 
 faithful account of what you have done since I saw 
 you last. If he lose that customer, he will lay it to 
 you ; he already accuses you of his not having 33 suc- 
 ceeded in the affair 13 he had undertaken. 41 They 
 say 13 I take after my uncle ; he must 7 have been very 
 ugly. When we 9 have to do with those usurers, we 
 must 7 agree to whatever they propose. I grant it, 
 but why have recourse to them ? In passing through 
 the forest, we saw 39 behind a tree, two men who 
 were taking 31 aim, and who would, no doubt, have 
 fired at us, if some horsemen, who were passing 31 at 
 the time, had not frightened them. 
 
 We alighted, 39 and, after we had embraced 42 each 
 other, (we drew our swords,) and fought 39 like 
 mettre Vepee a la main en 
 
 madmen. When business goes wrong, we 9 are in 
 desesperes 
 
38 EXERCISES. 
 
 an ill humour. He looks as if he were angry with 
 me. Why should he be angry with you ? If you 
 will come and meet me, be at the Elephant and 
 Castle at seven o' clock. Has he given you an ac- 
 count of the money 13 I sent him ? He lays his 
 being 33 a bankrupt to you. He told me that it was 
 you 13 he was angry with. His affairs were going 
 wrong, when I went to see him last year. Let him 
 lay it to his own extravagance. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be anxious Etre en peine de. 
 
 To approve Trouver bon. 
 
 To avail one's self of Profiter de. 
 
 To be (followed by an infinitive) Devoir. 
 
 To be (at a place) Se trouver. 
 
 To be anything but N'etre rien moins que. 
 
 It is with as II en est de . . . comme. 
 
 To begin to Se mettre a. 
 
 To believe, to give credit to Aj outer foi a. 
 
 To belong to, to be the duty to\ T , 
 
 To be the place to J ^re a 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 I am anxious to know how your brother is. If 
 you approve of it, I will accompany you. I will 
 avail myself of the opportunity. What are we to 
 think of his conduct ? I was not alone in the room ; 
 there were five or six gentlemen besides, reading the 
 papers. I told 38 him he was anything but an honest 
 man. It is with that as with everything he says, one 
 cannot believe it. They began to speak all at once. 
 They began to chatter like magpies. It was not so 
 with us, as we were four, we 39 began to play at 
 whist. That is anything but the truth. Am I to 
 say my lessons to you, sir, to-day ? I am anxious 
 
EXERCISES. 39 
 
 to hear how they have received him. He is anxious 
 
 fut. 
 to know how I discovered it. If those ladies ap- 
 prove of it, we will take tea with them. He availed 39 
 himself of my absence to* ruin me in the king's 
 mind. What 5 am I to conclude from his silence ? 
 France is in a miserable situation. Louis the 
 Eleventh was anything but a good king. She. 
 began 39 to abuse him like a (Billingsgate woman). 
 
 Give us some advice ; what are we to do ? You see 
 the situation 13 we are in ; our enemies will avail them- 
 selves of it, and we shall be ruined. 42 Instead of 
 giving us any advice, he began to reproach us of the 
 little esteem 13 we had for him. Is this hat yours ? 
 No, it belongs to my brother. That is not yours, it 
 belongs to me. Can one believe what that man 32 
 says ? I cannot believe you. That hat belongs 
 to me. It is impossible to believe what that man 32 
 says, he is so accustomed to tell falsehoods. You 
 must never take what belongs to others. That must 7 
 belong to you, it is not mine. They 9 will be anxious 
 at home to know where I am. If you approve of it, 
 I will send for the gentleman who was 38 a witness to 
 the transaction. 
 
 What are we to think of the conduct of the present 
 ministry, with regard to Portugal ? If you want to 
 see the prime minister, you have only 149 to be in 
 Hyde Park at six o'clock in the morning. He is 
 anything but an honest man. It is with politics, as 
 with religion : [the] more we 9 divef into them, [the] 
 more we 9 discover our ignorance. He met me yes- 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 f To dive into, approfondir. 
 
40 EXERCISES. 
 
 terday ; and (if he did not) begin to abuse me 
 
 ne voila-t-il pas que 
 in the middle of the street. How would you have 
 one believe 19 so extraordinary a story ? What be- 
 longs to you belongs to me likewise. It was your 
 place to* correct him. It is not your duty to speak 
 to him about it. He was very anxious to know what 
 I had said to him in my letter. He did not approve 
 of my speaking to him about it. Avail yourself of 
 
 subj. 
 his absence. Are we to answer such imperti- 
 nent questions ? I have often been in the same 
 (predicament). He is anything but your friend. 
 
 cas 
 It will be with that, as with everything you under- 
 take ; you will lose more than 26 you gain by it. 
 When he begins to speak, every one should hold his 
 peace. It is a thing 13 I should have some difficulty 
 to believe. Is this knife yours, sir ? No, it is my 
 brother's. Is it your place to call me to an account 
 for my conduct ? It is your place to command, and 
 mine to obey. You seem very anxious to know 
 where I am going. If you approve of it, sir, we will 
 (take a hand at cards) to night. He availed himself 
 
 /aire la partie 
 of our (mistake) . What are we to think of his con- 
 
 etouderie 
 duct towards his mother ? I have just heard from 
 my brother. Indeed ! where is he now ? It was not 
 my place to write to him first. 
 
 * Eire a, signifying to be the duty of, requires de before 
 the following verb ; otherwise use a. 
 
EXERCISES. 41 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be better or to have better Valoir mieux. 
 
 To bid good bye to Dire adieu a. 
 
 To fall out with Se brouiller avec* 
 
 To bleed (neuter) Saigner de. 
 To blind or deceive (by false j j dg u drg mx 
 
 appearances) ) ' 
 
 To .box Se battre a coups de poing. 
 
 To train or bring up to Dresser a. 
 
 To care about S' embarrasser de^se soucier de . 
 
 I do not care Cela mest SgaL 
 
 To trouble one's self about Se mettre en peine de. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 It is better to die once for all, than 26 to be for 
 ever fearing 31 death. 45 Bid me good-bye before you 
 go away. Look, how his nose bleeds ! By the re- 
 serve 13 I (put on in their presence), I deceived them. 
 
 garder avec eux 
 His devout appearance and his pretended goodness 
 deceived 39 them. My arm is bleeding. I must bid 
 good-bye to all my friends. Is it not 1 better to 
 make [people] happy than unhappy ? Is it not 
 better to do good than evil ? He came yesterday to 
 bid me good-bye. My nose bled 38 this morning 
 for three quarters of an hour. He blinds every one 
 pendant 
 
 by the parties he gives. They 9 do not box in 
 France. Do you see those two dogs ? I am going 
 to train them for hunting. It is better not to talk 
 at all, than 26 to expose one's self by talking non- 
 sense. I have bid good-bye to all my friends, for I 
 set out to-morrow morning. His mouth bleeds. It 
 is only to blind you, that he treats you so kindly. 
 Do you know [how] to box ? Let us bring him up 
 
42 EXERCISES. 
 
 ourselves to glory. He has fallen out with all his 
 friends. He fell out with him before all the com- 
 pany. We have fallen out with them. Do not fall 
 out with me. He must 7 come and bid me good-bye. 
 It is better to come late than never. He has fallen 
 out with his father. I will come and 15 bid you good- 
 bye before I go away.* Do not go away without 
 
 de 
 bidding me good-bye. He does not care about that. 
 He does not care about us. He does not trouble 
 himself about what mayf happen to us. I care 
 much about it. 14 Provided you are 20 comfortable, 
 bien 
 
 you do not trouble yourself about others. Much 
 he cared about what you said. I care very little 
 about those things. What does he care about what 
 
 bien 
 you say ? Is it 1 not better to live happy than rich ? 
 Go and 15 bid your papa good-bye. It seems that 
 he had nothing to do, and 13 fell out with me toj 
 amuse himself. 
 
 He struck 39 his head against the wall, and his nose 
 bled for full an hour. It was toj blind the people 
 and strengthen their own party. People 9 are some- 
 times killed by boxing. If that dog were mine, I 
 should bring it up for hunting. I care very little 
 about what he can say of me. I will send you into 
 the country. I do not care. I care very little 
 what will become of me. If you think it will get 
 abroad, you had better go and 15 tell him it yourself; 
 it will be better for him to hear it from you, than 
 
 * See note, page 27. t See note, page 32. 
 
 % See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 43 
 
 from (any one else), but (have your wits about you). 
 
 tout autre etre sur ses gardes 
 
 You had better go to him yourself; but above all, 
 do not let him know that I had any hand in 
 it; 14 (be advised by me), go to him yourself, for 
 
 croyez-moi 
 (when all comes to all) what [great] harm have you 
 
 apres tout 
 done? Go and 16 bid your friends good-bye, after 
 that come to me at your father's. My wife has fallen 
 out with all my relations. My heart bleeds at it. 
 It is to blind his neighbours, that he pretends to 
 live so sparingly. Do the boys 2 box in France? 
 They 9 have recourse to very cruel methods in order 
 to train horses for racing. It is better not to let 
 (the cat out of the bag). It would be better not to 
 
 divulguer le secret 
 give him what he asks ; remember that (charity be- 
 
 la charite 
 gins at home). If you will not 
 
 Men ordonnee commence par soi-meme. 
 lend me the money 13 I want, I do not care, I will 
 try to get it somewhere else. Do not trouble your- 
 self about what shall become of me. Do you know 
 it is my son who has just bid me good-bye ? You 
 would* (make me believe next, that the moon is 
 
 m? en fair e accroire 
 made of green cheese) ; he is no [more] like you 
 (than chalk is like cheese) . 
 pas du tout 
 
 See note, page 32. 
 
44 EXERCISES. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To clap hands Battre des mains. 
 
 To clear away Desservir. 
 
 To lay the cloth Mettre la nappe. 
 
 To be in collusion with ( S '? nte ?*" ™ e °' 
 
 \htre a intelligence avec. 
 
 To come to an engagement 1 -n 
 
 To come to blows ) En vemr aux mams - 
 
 To be comfortable Se trover bien. 
 
 To be at stake (impersonal) II y va de. 
 
 To confine one's self to ) , . . v 
 
 To stick, to keep to ) Sententra. 
 
 To be of consequence to Importer de. 
 
 To crown Mettre le comble a. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 They 9 clapped 40 hands at every word he said. 40 
 You should* have heard how they clapped. They 9 
 will clear away, whilst we are gone to take a walk 
 
 fut. 
 in the park. Is the 10 cloth laid ? My valet was in 
 collusion with my steward. They were in collusion. 
 They soon came to an engagement. I am very com- 
 fortable here, I shall not move. Your interest, your 
 glory, is at stake. Stick to that. I will adhere to 
 what I have said. He did not confine 39 himself 
 to that, he carried things still further. Why do 
 
 pousser 
 you not go, since your interest is at stake ? He 
 was so comfortable where he was, that he would* 
 not go away. The two armies were ready to come 
 to an engagement. You must 7 be in collusion with 
 my attorney to rob me. Had they 9 cleared away ? 
 No, the cloth had not yet been laid. 10 You should 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
EXERCISES. 45 
 
 have heard them clapping, I applauded 40 too ; but 
 you will not catch me at it again. You have de- 
 prived him of liberty ; you ought to confine yourself 
 to that, and let him live. It was of great conse- 
 quence to us, that he should 18 know nothing about 
 it. To* crown my misfortunes, a malignant fever 
 deprived me of my wife. It was the loss of my only 
 son that crowned 39 my misery. [That] is of [very] 
 little consequence. [It] is of no consequence. [Of] 
 what consequence is it to me ? [Of] what conse- 
 quence is it ? That will complete my happiness. 
 That will crown my wishes. It is the custom to 
 clap hands, when we 9 are satisfied with an actor. 
 Let us go and 15 take our dessert in the parlour ; 
 the servant will then be able to clear away in the 
 dining-room. Lay the cloth in the drawing-room 
 for twelve persons. Those two men are in collusion 
 to rob you. 
 
 After having abused one another, they soon came 
 to blows. Since you are so comfortable where you 
 are, you would do wrong to leave. It is not only 
 imprudent, what you have done, but do you know 13 
 (it is a hanging matter) ? Your life is at stake. They 
 
 il y va de la corde 
 will not confine themselves to threats. [Of] what 
 consequence is it, that it should be 10 known ? 19 Do 
 you hear how they 9 are clapping hands? Have 
 they 9 not yet cleared away ? I willf not have the 
 cloth laid 10 in this room any more, it is too cold 
 
 subj. 
 here. Servants are in collusion with one another to 
 rob their masters. If the constables had not inter- 
 fered, they would soon have come to blows. I was 
 * See note, page 3. f See note, page 32. 
 
46 EXERCISES. 
 
 very comfortable in that house, 'till my master was 
 
 subj. 
 [a] bankrupt ; as soon as I heard that, (no longer pipe 
 
 point d y argent 
 no longer dance) you know, I quitted 39 immediately. 
 point de Suisse 
 
 As my dinner was at stake, I made haste. As I 
 was tired of (dancing attendance on) his lord- 
 
 faire le pied de grue chez 
 ship, in the middle of winter. I confined myself to 
 
 coeur 
 the situation which had been 10 offered me at a 
 clothier's. It was of great consequence 18 to us 
 that the business should not (get wind), but a ser- 
 
 se savoir 
 vant whom I turned away, let the cat out of the 
 bag. To crown my misfortunes, my uncle, who had 
 promised to make me his heir, died intestate. When 
 they 9 have 25 cleared away, come to me in my room. 
 It is of great consequence that you should 18 know 
 what I am about to do. My son is the only one 
 wanting to crown my joy ; I hope he is happy. You 
 will do right to stick to what you have said. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To bring good luck Porter bonheur. 
 
 To bring ill or bad luck Porter malheur. 
 
 To deprive oneself of \ „*. 
 To get out of the way J 
 To deprive of or take away from Oter a. 
 
 To do without Se passer de. 
 
 To do with Tirer parti de. 
 
 To dwell on one's mind Tenir au cosur a. 
 
 To enable Mettre en etat de. 
 
 To enter into conversation Lier conversation. 
 
 To envy Porter cnvie a. 
 
 To escape from S'echapper de. 
 
EXERCISES. 47 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 The miser deprives himself of what [is] necessary. 
 
 le 
 He did not deprive him of life. I can very well do 
 without those dainties. What do you think of doing 
 
 Quel 
 with that ? "What dwells most on my mind, is 
 [the] having lost my watch. I will enable you to 
 live at ease. I do very well without beer; why 
 should not you? They 9 took 39 from him all he 
 possessed. I shall never be able to do anything 
 with that lad. I have deprived myself of what is 
 necessary, in order to enable him to establish him- 
 self. Get away from before the fire. Get out of 
 the light. Get out of (my sight). Take two from 
 
 jour devant moi 
 
 five [and there] remain three. You will not be able 
 
 reste 
 to do without me. One 9 cannot do without bread. 
 That seems to dwell on your mind. That will bring 
 me good luck. That always brings me bad luck. 
 You have enabled me to be of service to you. 
 Take nine from sixteen, there will remain seven. 
 Get away from there. I hope 13 that will bring him 
 good luck. You have deprived yourself of the 
 power of serving your friends. If you wish to 
 
 vouloir 
 enjoy good health, you must 8 do without wine. I 
 do without wine ! never will I do without it ; you 
 have enabled me to purchase some, and I will drink 
 some all my lifetime. What can I do with that 
 lad ; was 38 [the like] ever seen : he cannot do with- 
 out wine. I entered 39 into conversation with them. 
 Far from envying me, you ought to pity me- He 
 
48 EXERCISES. 
 
 has escaped from prison. Every one envies him. I 
 wished 40 to enter into conversation with him, but 
 he shunned me. He made 39 his escape from the 
 tower, dressed in woman's [clothes] . We had soon 
 entered into conversation. That boy envies all his 
 companions. You must 8 not envy the rich, they are 
 not happier than you. He would 39 * not enter into 
 conversation with me. 
 
 That has brought me bad luck. You will see if 
 that does not bring you good look. Do not imagine, 
 sir, that I am going 19 to deprive myself of what is 
 necessary to provide for your extravagant expenses. 
 Get out of [the] way, sir, if you please : this is my 
 
 la 
 place. How can you do without me ? What would 
 you have me do with such a lad ? Let not that 
 
 subj. 
 dwell on your mind ; I will pay the debt for you. 
 I only asked him to lend me [a little] money, to 
 enable me to be doing 31 something, and he has 
 refused me. How can one enter into conversation 
 with people 13 one does not know ? You are wrong 
 to envy me, I assure you, I am more wretched than 
 yourself. Three men have escaped from prison. 
 He deprives himself of the necessaries of life for 
 his children. Get away from there, that I may 
 sit down. After he had deprived himself of every 
 se mettre 
 
 thing, and had not a farthing left, he went and 15 
 begged for his children. From fifteen take four, 
 there remain eleven. He will be deprived 10 of his 
 pension; he will be reduced to pass the summer 
 
 * See note, p. 32. 
 
EXERCISES. 49 
 
 without victuals, and the winter without [a] cloak. I 
 
 manger 
 could rather do without meat than bread. (I should 
 
 je voudrais 
 like) you to tell me what can be done with so bad a 
 que subj. 
 
 boy. The loss he has sustained^ 1 still dwells on his 
 mind. It is you who have enabled me to get my 
 
 gagner mon 
 livelihood. We were 39 not long before we entered 
 
 pain 
 into conversation. Far from envying you, my friend, 
 I pity you. He must 7 have escaped from prison 
 plaindre 
 
 during the night. Will you have the goodness to 
 get away from before the fire. She has deprived 
 herself of everything for her children. We should 
 be much better, if we were to do without meat once 
 or twice a-week. What can be done with that rub- 
 bish ? I am sorry 13 that dwells so much on his 
 
 subj. 
 mind. That will enable you to take a little shop. 
 He will* never enter into conversation with any one. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To escape (dangers, &c.) Echapper a. 
 
 To escape (neuter) Se sauver. 
 
 To have a narrow escape L' echapper belle. 
 
 To be exhausted N'en pouvoir plus. 
 
 To fall into (snares) Donner dans. 
 
 To find fault with Trouver a redire d. 
 
 To knock, or strike one's head against Donner de la tete contre. 
 
 To allude to Faire allusion a. 
 
 To beg (neuter) Demander Vaumone. 
 
 As swift as an arrow, or as lightning Comme un eclair* 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
 I) 
 
50 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 You have been very fortunate to escape the dangers 
 that threatened you. He escaped with his household 
 
 penates 
 gods. His prey has escaped him. He fell into 
 the snare that had been 10 laid for him. You always 
 have some fault to find. He fell into the snares that 
 had been 10 laid 41 for him. He is quite exhausted, 
 poor man ; support him. You had a very narrow 
 escape. What have you to find fault with ? Have 
 we not had a narrow escape ? Escape, if you can. 
 Take care, or else she will escape you. I will escape, 
 
 bien 
 if I can. I say, Peter, we have had a narrow 
 
 dis done 
 escape ; have not we ? I had 40 been running for 
 two hours; I was quite exhausted. You will see 
 that he will fall into the snare. He must 7 find 
 
 panneau 
 fault, or he would not be satisfied. There is not a 
 thing 13 I do, but he finds fault with it. Even 
 subj. que quand 
 
 though you should do it as he tells you, he would 
 meme 
 
 find fault with it. That shall not escape me, if I 
 can help it. Let us escape together. What fault 
 can you find with it ? You shall not escape me 
 again, I warrant you. Let [him] who is able, escape. 
 
 en repondre 
 What a narrow escape we have had ; have we not ? 
 I ran 38 until I was quite exhausted. (A burnt 
 
 chat echaude 
 child dreads the fire), he will not fall into the same 
 craint Veau froide 
 
EXERCISES. 51 
 
 snare again, depend upon it. I assure you 13 there 
 will be no fault to find with it. I do not care, I 
 will* see it, I will not buy a (pig in a poke). Do 
 
 chat en poche 
 you remember the evening 13 I put the candle out, 
 how, in seeking your way out, you struck your 
 head against the wall ? Yes, yes, I well rememberf 
 it; 14 but do not (rake up old grievances). The 
 
 reveiller le chat qui dort 
 poet alludes to an old story. That man, formerly 
 so rich, is actually obliged to beg. He set off like 
 lightning. The arrow flew like lightning. He has 
 escaped the severity of the law. I had made up my 
 mind to escape on the first opportunity. I have had 
 
 a 
 
 a narrow escape. The remembrance of the danger 
 
 I have just escaped, (makes my hair stand on 
 
 me fait dresser les cheveux a 
 
 end). I have just been so long a walk, that I am 
 
 la tete 
 
 quite exhausted. I do not think 13 he will fall into 
 the snare. You must be finding fault, or it would 
 
 vous ne seriez 
 not be you. In trying to go and 15 feed his 
 pas content vouloir 
 
 horse, without a light, he ran 39 his nose against 
 the wall, and returned all covered with blood. 
 It is to the story of Pyramus and Thisbe he alludes. 
 Do you see yonder man begging ? last year he was 
 richer than I. As soon as he perceived us, he was 
 off like a shot. He never opens his mouth but to 
 
 que 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
 f Se rappeler, to remember, does not require a preposition 
 after it ; therefore it must be translated by le : Je me le rap- 
 pelle bien. 
 
 B 2 
 
52 EXERCISES. 
 
 find fault. His name has escaped my [memory] . 
 Some imprudent words escaped 39 him. If he remain 
 to dinner, it will only 149 be to find fault. What could 
 I do ? I was quite exhausted : they were four [to] one 
 against [me] ; I was obliged to surrender. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To find it worth one's while Y trouver son compte. 
 
 To set fire to Mettre le feu a. 
 
 To stand firm Tenir bon. 
 
 God forbid A Dieu ne plaise (subj.) 
 
 To be friends again with Se remettre avec. 
 
 To get out of trouble Se tirer d' affaire. 
 
 To get out of a scrape Se tirer d'embarras. 
 
 To get into bed Se mettre au lit. 
 
 To expect (neuter) S'attendre a. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 I did not expect that. Grant him what he asks ; 
 you will find it worth your while. They glory in 
 setting fire to their neighbours' houses. If you had 
 stood firm ; you would still be in your situation. God 
 forbid, my friend, that I should be angry ivith your 
 father. God forbid that I should find fault with it. 
 He suspects that some one has set 17 fire to his 
 house. Stand firm, they will not be able to make 
 you leave. He will not find it worth his while. 
 Before I lend you the money 13 you want, let us see 
 whether I shall find it worth my while. Take care, 
 you will set fire to the house. If he had stood firm, 
 he would have succeeded. God forbid that I should 
 hate any one. I have made friends again with your 
 brother. You must first know whether it will be 
 worth your while. They fired the city in several 
 parts. If you had been firm, my friend, that would 
 
EXERCISES. 53 
 
 not have happened, God forbid, madam, that I should 
 be as poor as you imagine. He is friends again with 
 his brother-in-law. I am (over ears) in trouble, 
 
 jusqu'au cou 
 and how to get out of it I do not know. If he 
 get out of this scrape, it will be a miracle. Come, 
 
 par 
 get into bed, sir, directly. I did not expect to find 
 you here. The duke, addressing himself to the 
 marquis, said, I suspect your valet of having set 
 fire to my house. If that gentleman, who affects 
 the manners of a diplomatist, had been firm, he would 
 have married the duke's niece. You know that my 
 mother died two days after having given me birth ; if 
 you will bear witness to that, you will, perhaps, be 
 able to get me out of trouble. I know whom you 
 owe your birth to, and, I think, I shall be able to 
 get you out of this scrape. I never expected to see 
 the town again where I was born. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To give way to Se laisser alter a. 
 
 To repair to or to go to Se rendre a. 
 
 To go to (see) Alter trouver. 
 
 To go on one's own way Alter son train. 
 
 To have it, or to hit it Y etre. 
 
 To have just Venir de. 
 
 I have left. // me reste. 
 
 To happen to (before an inf.) Venir a. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 I gave way to my passions in my youth ; but I am 
 quite cured now, and I am sure you will not catch 
 me at it again. I will go to his house at ten ; I 
 
54 EXERCISES. 
 
 consider him rather crazy ; but I do not care, you 
 
 tenir 
 will find me there about ten. Come to me this 
 evening, and I will tell you why I distrust your 
 brother. Your brother still goes on in his old way ; 
 yesterday he lost me two hundred guineas, which 
 
 souffler 
 I might have got honestly; if he continue to 
 
 gagner 
 pursue so dishonest a conduct, he will incur the 
 hatred of every body. He takes a little after his 
 father. Yes, you have it, I have just told him so. 
 You (were engaged) with him, I think, when I 
 
 etre aux prises 
 entered. 38 I have this consolation, that I never 
 set him the example. If he should happen to hear 
 donner 
 
 that we are friends, he will do every thing in his 
 power (to set us by the ears). The man who gives 
 
 brouiller 
 way to his passions, is unworthy of life. He had 
 
 vivre 
 thought they would disobey his orders; but they 
 repaired thither immediately. I will go and 15 see 
 the marquis, and I will relate the adventure to him. 
 You still go on your own way; I perceive that 
 nothing is able to change you. Have you guessed 
 why I did that ? No ; but I think 13 I have it now : 
 it was to blind him, was it not ? Three men have 
 just been 10 hanged. If I give you all the money I 
 have, what shall I have left ? You will have the 
 pleasure left of having done a good action once in 
 your lifetime ; and of having obliged an old friend. 
 
 ancien 
 If your mamma should happen to hear that I took 
 
 mener 
 
EXERCISES. 55 
 
 you to the theatre, she would never forgive me. She 
 is sure to know, therefore you had better go to her 
 immediately, and tell her yourself. I have just been 
 told that there has been a riot at Lyons. Where 
 shall I put what I have left to say ? If your papa 
 should happen to know that you have not been to 
 church this morning, you will catch it, he will give 
 it you. You are mistaken, I have just told him, 
 en 
 
 and he is quite satisfied with the account I have just 
 given him of my conduct this morning. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To hear from Recevoir des nouvelles de. 
 
 To take ill Trouver mauvais. 
 
 To be inclined to Eire porte «. 
 
 To take a joke Entendre raillerie. 
 
 To abuse Dire des injures a. 
 
 To be a judge of Se connaitre a, or en. 
 
 To add fuel to fire Mettre le feu aux etoupes. 
 
 To go and join Alter sejoindre a. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 It is three months since I have heard from my 
 brother. I hope he will not take it ill that I 
 meddle with his affairs. On the contrary, I am 
 
 a 
 inclined to think that he will be much obliged to you 
 for it. He is a man who does not joke in those 
 matters. After having abused one another, they, at 
 last, parted good friends. Are you a judge of jew- 
 ellery ? When you have 25 heard from your uncle, 
 you will come and 15 acquaint me with the news, will 
 
56 EXERCISES. 
 
 you not ? Do not take it ill, if I interest myself in 
 your affairs. I was inclined to think he would have 
 joined our party : but he has gone and joined the 
 opposite one. / have just heard from France. Per- 
 haps he will take it ill, if I write without asking his 
 permission. I should be inclined to believe it. He 
 is a man who can [give a joke and] take a joke. 
 What, after abusing me, as she has just been doing, 
 you would have me see her home ! Are you also 
 
 reconduire subj. 
 going to join my enemies, to ruin me totally ? Be a 
 better judge of people. Are you a judge of precious 
 
 en gens 
 stones ? You must often let me hear from vou 
 
 me donner de vos nouvelles 
 during our separation. Have you heard lately from 
 your uncle ? I hope you will not take it ill, madam, 
 if I act as I please for once. I am inclined to think 
 
 subj. 
 that you had some hand in that business. Sir, I 
 assure you I had no hand in it at all, and that it is a 
 subject on which I am not disposed to joke. How 
 long is it since you heard from Jamaica ? What a 
 
 Comme 
 judge you are ! One must 7 be a good judge to have 
 to do with those people. She abused me in the 
 middle of the street. That is adding fuel to fire. 
 To add fuel to fire, she spoke 39 of the affairs that 
 had taken place the night before. 
 
EXERCISES. 57 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 Just the thing for you Votre affaire. 
 
 To kick Downer des coups de pied a. 
 
 To know how Savoir. 
 
 Not to know Ignorer, 
 
 To know Ne pas ignorer. 
 
 To laugh in one's face Rire au nez a. 
 
 To leave to S'en remettre a. 
 
 To depend upon Se reposer sur, 
 
 I long 11 me tarde de, 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 I have just the thing for you. Do you wish me 
 to kick you ? Do you know how to play on the 
 flute ? I do not know what you have done, but 
 I know that your father is very angry with you. 
 You know that at your uncle's death I lent 39 you a 
 hundred pounds. He had the insolence to laugh 
 in my face. I shall leave it to your integrity. You 
 will do wrong to depend upon the promise he has 
 made 41 you. If you will leave it to me, you shall 
 have reason to be satisfied. I long to see your 
 lovely children again. Here, here is just the thing 
 
 Tenez 
 for you. After they had kicked me until 20 they were 
 tired, they threw 39 me into a ditch ; happily it was a 
 dry one, or I should have been drowned. You know 
 how to tell a good story. I know not where you 
 have been since I saw you; but [if I were] to judge 
 by your manners, you have not frequented the best 
 society. Stay, I think I have just the thing for you. 
 I should really feel a pleasure in kicking that scoun- 
 drel. What ! do you 3 not know how to dance yet ? 
 
 Comment 
 I really do not know what you mean, I know it. 
 d 5 
 
58 EXERCISES. 
 
 What did 38 you reply to him ? I ? I laughed 38 in his 
 face. Give me that, it is just the thing 13 I want. 
 Do not kick me. Do you know 1 how to do that ? 
 It is a good thing not to know how to deceive. I do 
 not know the reason of his silence. He laughed in 
 my face, and went away. I leave it to your good 
 faith. I long to see your brother. He does not 
 know what people 9 think of him. I leave it to you. 
 If ever I meet him, I will kick him. He does not 
 know how to do it. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be long before Tarder a. 
 
 To want with (a thing) Vouloir de. 
 
 To want with (a person) Vouloir a. 
 
 To mind Tenir eompte de. 
 
 My name is Je me nomme. 
 
 To ..... nevertheless Ne laisser pas de. 
 
 To have no objection to Ne dcmander pas mieux que de. 
 
 To give reason Donner lieu, or sujei de. 
 
 To bear ill-will S avoir mauvais gre a. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 
 He will not be long before he comes. What do 
 you want with me ? He does not mind at all what 
 is said to him. He will not be long before he dis- 
 covers the fraud. What 5 do you want with that 
 gentleman? What 5 do you want with that pen- 
 knife ? His name is Nicholas, and hers Catharine. 
 Although 20 he says that he does not care about 
 going, I nevertheless think he would have no objec- 
 tion to go. I have not given you reason to be dis- 
 satisfied with me, but you have given me reason to 
 be dissatisfied with you. God forbid that I should 
 
EXERCISES. 59 
 
 bear you any ill-will for what you have said. What 
 subj. Comment 
 
 is your name? My name is Peter. I nevertheless 
 went 40 occasionally to see him. You will see that he 
 could bear me no ill-will for it. I have no objection 
 to accompany you. The winter will not be long 
 before it comes. It seems that you do not mind 
 what your parents 32 say to you. What is your 
 cousin's name ? His name is Henry. Although 20 
 I told your brother that I had?^ no hand in the 
 business, he nevertheless thinks me his enemy. I 
 have no objection to pay you/ but you must 8 abate 
 something. I have never given you any reason to 
 complain of me. I bear you no ill-will for it. I 
 have no objection to do you that service, but you 
 must 8 not mention it to my father. Although 20 he 
 does not like me, he nevertheless comes now and 
 then to see me. How long she is coming ! What 5 
 
 Que 
 do you want with my watch ? What 5 does that 
 woman want with me ? I nevertheless think he is 
 guilty. He does not mind at all what is said to 
 him. What is her name ? What is the name of 
 that girl ? Her name is Elizabeth. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To be obliged to Savoir bon gre a. 
 
 To be offended at Prendre en mauvaise part. 
 
 To be particular Y regarder de pres. 
 
 To profit by Profiter de. 
 
 To pump Tirer les vers du nez a. 
 
 To be satisfied with. or\ ,, , 
 
 n , . ..i ' > oe contenter de. 
 
 I o put up with J 
 
 To put up with, to bear Essuypr. 
 
 To put up to Mettre au fait. 
 
 To have rather Aimer mieux. 
 
60 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 You must 8 not be offended at what I am going to 
 tell you. I am much obliged to my parents for 
 
 de 
 having severely chastised me. Among friends, one 9 
 should not be so particular. Endeavour to profit 
 by the lessons 13 I give you. He wanted 40 to pump 
 me, but he found 39 himself caught. I am satisfied 
 with little. I must 7 put up with what is given 10 
 me. I was 8 obliged to put up with all their ill- 
 treatment. I will put you up to it in a few words. 
 I had rather do without it, than 26 have it at that 
 price. I had rather laugh than 26 cry. You must 
 put him up to it. I am 7 obliged to put up with a 
 long discourse every morning, that 23 I could very 
 well do without. The Romans were satisfied with 
 depriving their enemies of the power of doing them 
 an injury. He went to see my father in order 
 to pump him. Are you 3 always so particular ? I 
 am much obliged to you for your good opinion. He 
 is offended at every thing. You are very particular. 
 I have profited by your advice. It was to pump 
 me that he came 39 to see me. Nature is satisfied 
 with [what is] necessary. Reason is satisfied with 
 [what is] useful. I was 39 obliged 8 to put up with a 
 long lecture every night, before I went to bed. It 
 will not be difficult to put him up to it. I had 
 rather die than 26 offend you. Who 5 would not 
 rather live happy than miserable? We 9 spend 
 money like fools when we 9 are young, but we 9 
 are more particular when we 9 grow old. The wise 
 man knows how to profit by the follies of others. 
 He who knows how to be satisfied with little, needs 
 never fear poverty. Notwithstanding, I had rather 
 be rich than poor. 
 
EXERCISES. 61 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To set sail Mettre a la voile. 
 
 To take satisfaction for Tirer raison de. 
 
 To save the life of Sauver la vie a. 
 
 To make one's self master of Se rendre maitre de. 
 
 To seize on Se saisir de. 
 
 To serve Rendre service a. 
 
 To serve as, or for Servir de. 
 
 To set out on a journey Se mettre en route. 
 
 To share Prendre part a. 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 We were 39 not long before we set sail. He will 
 take satisfaction for that affront. I have saved his 
 life three times. The enemies have made 41 them- 
 selves masters of all the strong places. All his 
 goods have been 10 seized. Will you 1 serve me? 
 That room serves for a study. After having bid 
 good-bye to all, we set 39 out on our journey. She 
 shared all my misfortunes. You can serve 1 me, if 
 you will. That will serve me as an excuse. We 
 set 39 out on our journey at three o' clock in the after- 
 
 de 
 noon. My brother had 38 no share in that transac- 
 tion. Your husband has saved my brother's life. 
 That serves him as a pretext. We set 39 sail [on] 
 the twelfth of August, one thousand eight hun- 
 dred and fifty-one. I shall know how to take 
 satisfaction for that insult. He 130 who, at the 
 risk of his [own] life, saves that of another, is a 
 courageous man. They had soon made 41 themselves 
 masters of the town. After having seized on all his 
 goods, they put 39 him into prison. Try to get 
 acquainted with him, he may be able to serve you. 
 Their cakes served 39 them for plates. We set 39 out 
 
62 EXERCISES. 
 
 on our journey without a penny. You will have 
 reason to repent the share you have had 41 in that 
 business. We shall set sail to-morrow morning. 
 You have saved my life. After having made 41 them- 
 selves masters of the city, they put all the inha- 
 
 passer 
 bitants to the sword. The enemies seized 39 on all 
 
 au fil de Vepee 
 my horses. If I can serve you, do not spare me, I 
 am entirely (yours). Come, let us set out; if it 
 
 a votre service 
 should rain, we have umbrellas. He seems to share 
 all my troubles. As we wanted a surgeon, before 
 we set sail, we went and 15 seized the village doctor. 
 His money will save his life. He made himself 
 master of all our ships. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To shelter Mettre a Vabri, or a convert de. 
 
 To fire on Faire feu sur. 
 
 To sink Couler a fond. 
 
 To sit down to meals Se mettre a table. 
 
 To make game of Se jouer de. 
 
 To stand Etre debout. 
 
 To do for, or to be to Tenir lieu de. 
 
 To succeed Venir a bout de. 
 
 To suspect Se douter de. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 We are going to sink. Sit down to dinner. Let 
 us take shelter. They fired on us in the middle 
 of the night. Your silence will not shelter you from 
 his revenge. Are you making game of me ? The 
 
EXERCISES. 63 
 
 gentlemen were standing by the side of the ladies. 
 My uncle is a father to me. He did not suspect 
 the trick that had been 10 played him. Let us 
 shelter ourselves from the rain. The soldiers fired 
 on the people. The ship is going to sink. Come,, 
 gentlemen, sit down to dinner. The rascal was 
 making game of me. We were standing all the 
 evening. You are now a father, a mother, a husband, 
 every thing to me. If you do not proceed more 
 quickly, you will never end. I have succeeded in 
 
 a 
 persuading him to accompany us. He did not sus- 
 pect it. It is difficult to shelter one's self from 
 slander. They thought the ship was going to sink. 
 We set down to dinner with a good appetite, but the 
 ragout that was served 10 us, soon made 39 us lose it. 
 I suspected the trick 13 he was going to play me. I 
 do not suffer [any] one 9 to make game of me so. I 
 was standing behind the door. That will do for a 
 tablecloth for you. What ! when it is pouring with 
 
 Comment 
 rain, you would not have me shelter myself ! If you 
 
 que subj. 
 
 make game of me in that manner, I shall know 
 {how] to be revenged for it. He will never suspect 
 it. You shall be a daughter to me. I suspected 13 
 he was going to do that. He is toiling to get rich, 
 but he will never succeed. The most prudent can- 
 not always shelter themselves from the misfortunes 
 of this life. He is in prison. I suspected so, he is 
 an imprudent [man], who well deserves it. 
 
64 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To take into one s head, or} c , . , 
 rp , i , ,« . > o avtser ae. 
 
 To take upon ones self / 
 
 To take from (by violence) Enlever a. 
 
 To thank Rendre graces a. 
 
 To treat (ill or well) En user avec. 
 
 To trust Se fier a. 
 
 To turn out of doors Mettre a la porte, or ckasser. 
 
 To be of no use Ne servir de rien. 
 
 To want, or to be deficient in II manque a. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 Do not take upon yourself to do that. I have had 
 my treasure taken 10 from me. Thank heaven that 
 they 9 did not take away your life. You treat your 
 sister very unpolitely. I will not trust you again. 
 If you answer me, I will turn you out of doors. 
 
 repliquer 
 It was of no use my representing to him the wrong 13 
 he did me ; he still went on his own way. You have 
 only given me nineteen sous, there wants one to 
 make a franc. What 6 have you taken into your 
 head now? They 9 have taken his daughter away 
 from him. I thank God that I had 38 no hand in 
 
 a 
 that business. I thank you a thousand times for 
 your kindness. Do you 3 treat every body so ? Is 
 that 3 the way 13 you treat your brother ? Trust to 
 me. I have been 10 turned out of doors this morn- 
 ing, for having broken a dozen eggs. It is of no use 
 for me to complain to her father, he is prejudiced 
 against me. He is only deficient in courage. What 5 
 are you in want of ? This pack of cards is not com- 
 plete ; the ace of clubs is wanting. She has taken 
 into her head to go all alone to Paris. The robbers, 
 
EXERCISES. 65 
 
 after having taken his portmanteau from him, and 
 emptied his pockets, let him go. I thank you for 
 having rid me of that scoundrel. If you treat your 
 friends so, how do you treat your enemies ? Yes, 
 trust to that. If you do that you will soon be 
 turned out pf doors. It will be of no use for you to 
 swear to him that you are innocent, he will not 
 believe you. You are very deficient in politeness. 
 All my jewels have been 10 taken from me. I have 
 just turned my servant out of doors ; the jade has 
 
 la coquine 
 broken all my china. My waistcoat wants two 
 buttons. I cannot pay you, I am three shillings 
 deficient. You ought to thank heaven for it. How 
 many leaves are wanting to that book ? You are not 
 in want of anything. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To ache Avoir mal a. 
 
 To act foolishly Faire une folie, or des folies. 
 
 To affect the manners of Trancher de. 
 
 As it seems, as I see A ce qu'il par ait, a ce que je vols. 
 
 Too bad Trop fort. 
 
 To be to (i. e. to concern) Faire a. 
 
 To be up to Etre au fait. 
 
 To break out (a fire) Prendre a. 
 
 To catch at it Y prendre. 
 
 To catch it En avoir. . 
 
 To strike colours Baisser pavilion, 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 My head aches. My teeth ache. You have 
 acted foolishly in that. He affects the manners of a 
 lord. You have some money, it seems. That is 
 
66 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 rather too bad. What 5 is that to you ? He is not 
 up to it. A fire broke out last night in my neigh- 
 bour's house. If you catch me at it again, I will 
 give you leave to laugh at me. You will catch it, if 
 you are 10 seen here. Before you, I must 7 always 
 strike colours. I have written so much, that really 
 my fingers ache. If you act so foolishly, you must 8 
 not be surprised if you are ill. You are, I see, 
 
 avez 
 rather cracked. Upon my word, that is too 
 V esprit un peu timbre. Vraiment 
 
 bad. What 5 is that to me? That is nothing to 
 you. If you had been up to it, you would have 
 laughed too. If a fire were to break out in the 
 neighbourhood, what 5 would you do ? I have lent 
 him money, but you will not catch me at it again. 
 He will catch it famously, if he is 10 taken. (I give in) 
 joliment se rendre 
 
 I must strike colours. I have walked so much to- 
 day that my feet ache. You have acted very fool- 
 ishly. You have, it seems, more leisure than I, yet 
 you do not write to me so often as I write to you. 
 It is too bad to tell him to his face that you will not 
 pay him. You do not understand anything about it, 
 you are not up to it. If a fire were to break out be- 
 low stairs, which way would you escape ? If I catch 
 you at it, I will pull your 122 ears. You will catch it, 
 if it be 10 known that you are playing, instead of 
 going to school. You are completely beaten, you 
 must strike coloilrs. I ache all over me. You 
 
 Avoir 
 look better, I see, than [you were] the last time 13 
 meilleure mine 
 
 I had the pleasure of seeing you. Is not that too 
 bad? 
 
EXERCISES. 67 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 To dress one's self. Faire sa toilette. 
 
 To drive over, or go over Passer sur. 
 
 To be at expense Faire des depenses. 
 
 To be at the expense of Faire les frais de. 
 
 To give it En dormer. 
 
 To have like to Penser. 
 
 To leave in the lurch Planter la. 
 
 To make the most of Faire valoir. 
 
 Merely, only Ne faire que. 
 
 How is it possible to Le moyen de. 
 
 There is no possibility of // riy a pas moyen de. 
 
 Not to see at all Ne coir goutte. 
 
 To understand how to S' entendre a. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 She is gone 42 up stairs to dress herself. You are 
 en haut 
 a long time dressing. How long he is dressing ! 
 The wheel went over his body. The coach drove 
 over his leg. He is at a great expense. I will be at 
 the expense of the journey. Who is to be at the ex- 
 pense of it ? I will give it you, if I catch you. He 
 will give it him, if he catch him. I had like to have 
 fallen. He left me in the lurch. He knows how to 
 make the most of his talents. I only touched him. 
 I merely took it into my hand to look at it. How is 
 it possible to do it ? When I am 25 dressed, I shall 
 be at your command. I fell 39 backwards, and a 
 
 a la renverse 
 cabriolet drove over my left arm. I have been 
 at some extra expense to-day. Who will be at the 
 expense of that undertaking ? I will give it him if 
 he do it again. I had like to have broken my neck. 
 You must 8 learn to make the most of your money. 
 I merely said a word, and the affair was settled. 
 
68 EXERCISES. 
 
 How is it possible to learn my lesson, when so much 
 noise is made? 10 There is no possibility of persuad- 
 ing him. I [could] not see at all. He understands 
 how to flatter. The lady will come down as soon as 
 she is 25 dressed. A coach went over his body, and 
 killed him. I have been at so much expense to-day, 
 that I have no money left. Who 5 will be at the ex- 
 pense of your cure? She had liked to have fainted. 
 How is it possible for me to get out of trouble ? 
 There is no possibility of succeeding. When you 
 want 25 his assistance, he will leave you in the lurch. 
 The expense you are at will soon empty your purse. 
 I had like (to have died) with laughter. She 
 
 crever 
 understands well how to cook; I am very fond of her 
 apple tarts. 
 
AN EXERCISE 
 
 ON IDIOMS OF RARER OCCURRENCE, OR OF LESS IMPORT- 
 ANCE, THE FRENCH OF WHICH MAY BE FOUND IN 
 THE INDEX AT THE END OF THE BOOK. 
 
 We abstain from meat to-day. Are we 1 agreed, is 
 it a bargain ? They applauded everything 13 tie 
 
 fait ? 
 
 said. 40 This meat has been 10 baked. He is always 
 talking of niusic^ it is his hobby. Bear witness to 
 the truth of what I say. I am quite benumbed. My 
 mother died 39 three weeks after she had given birth 
 to me. My father owed* his birth to a peasant girl 
 of the environs of Paris. Bolt the door. Is the 
 door bolted? We were bound for Jamaica. We 
 must 8 know [febw] to bridle our passions. You are 
 
 ses 
 
 over careful of yourself It seems you have bought 
 that shawl very cheap. He is very clever on the 
 piano. I lived* in clover all the while I was there. 
 A thought strikes me : suppose you pretend to be my 
 brother. Your honour is concerned. He received 
 me coolly, and deprived me of any inclination to pay 
 him a second visit. Take care that this letter be de- 
 livered to him. / had 38 some difficulty to put an end 
 to their dispute. He wanted to make me believe 
 that he had just arrived from Algiers ; pooh ! said I, 
 
 bon 
 
70 EXERCISES. 
 
 that will not do, I am not 10 to be caught so. He 
 has drawn upon himself the hatred of all his friends. 
 He was driven out of the town. We stopped 39 and 
 faced the robbers. That colour soon fades. The 
 kingdom of Heaven/^// 39 to the lot of Jupiter. He 
 fell upon the fish, as if he had not eaten for a week.* 
 The weather is going to be fine again. He drinks 
 like a fish. I forgive you your rudeness. You 
 ought to forgive your brother. All I wish now, is to 
 get safe out of that business. He takes it for granted. 
 He seems to have a spite against you. / have a wife 
 and three small children on my hands. That wine 
 is heady. He seems to have that at heart. I cannot 
 help it. That is but idle talk, sheer nonsense. He 
 imitates his father so well, that I often take the one 
 for the other. You have been imposed upon. He 
 has incurred the reproaches of his parents. What 
 could have induced you to do that. He is indulging 
 himself, it seems, this afternoon. It is not very 
 polite to interrupt me in that manner. We soon 
 joined? 9 the sport. You have laid a very foolish 
 wager. We used to lay travellers under contribution. 
 I would lay my life, it is not true. We usedt to live 
 well at the bishop's. You run the risk of living ill 
 in that family. Lock the door. Have you locked 
 the door ? You look well. He is making faces at 
 me. What do you mean ? Have you made up your 
 mind? You make my mouth water. I have never 
 given you occasion to scold me. Come, pack off, I 
 do not want you any longer. He would 38 J never 
 pardon his brother. How can one pity such people ? 
 
 * The difference between an, jour, matin, semaine, and an" 
 nee, journee, matinee, huit jours, is, that the latter words are 
 used when only the duration of time is signified. 
 
 f See note, page 20. 
 
 J See note, page 32. 
 
EXERCISES. 71 
 
 That poor woman excited my pity. I tell you plainly 
 that you are anything but an honest man. He is 
 playing on the violin. The poor woman had pledged 
 all her clothes. You are praising the city where I 
 was born. Make me a present of that ring. He 
 presumes on his pompous titles. He does not much 
 
 gros 
 prize your friendship. He is proof against misfor- 
 tunes. He profits by the lessons that are given 10 
 him. If you think proper, I will accompany you. 
 The conduct you have hitherto pursued* 1 is irre- 
 proachable. Why do you put off until to-morrow, 
 what you can do to-day ? It was to put his creditors 
 on a wrong scent that he (spread) that report. 
 
 /aire courir 
 After having made 41 themselves masters of the town, 
 they put all the garrison to the sword. He is not 
 reasonable. I have not received a penny since I have 
 been here. You do not reflect ; how can I go with- 
 
 pres. ind. 
 out shoes ? He related his misfortunes to me. He 
 relies on the promises you have made him. I shall 
 return home about ten o'clock. We rose 39 from din- 
 ner about eight o'clock. You shall roll in gold and 
 silver. I lent him a few pounds to set him up again. 
 How simple you are ! Here I am out of a situation 
 again. It was to vex his parents that he did so. Do 
 not come to see me to-morrow ; it is to morrow that 
 they 9 wash. He wears a white hat. Thank God, I 
 am very well. Send me word where you are going to 
 live. Do not go from your word with me. He wishes 
 very much to see Paris. 
 
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE 
 
 ON THE IDIOMS, ETC. 
 
 If you will* make me a present of that book, I will 
 accept it willingly. You pay no attention to what 
 is said 10 to you. We set sail with a favourable wind. 
 Have you shaved yourself this morning ? No, I got 38 
 shaved by the barber. They 9 do not eat meat [on] 
 Fridays, in France; they 9 abstain entirely from meat 
 [on] those days. I will go, my glory is at stake. 
 I did 38 ,it once ; but you will not catch me at it again. 
 I should like to see how you will set about it. You 
 have not hit it yet, far from it. I do that ! you do 
 not reflect, it is a hanging matter ! If he has lost 
 his situation, let him lay it to himself. You have 
 been imposed upon ; who 5 told it you ? You must 8 
 not be angry with me, I tell you the truth. He is 
 anxious to know where I am going. Life is short 
 and tiresome ; it is all spent in wishing ; we put off 
 our rest and our pleasures to that age, when often 
 the best possessions, health and youth, have already 
 disappeared • that time comes, surprising us still in 
 the midst of wishes, we (are still at it) when the 
 
 y etre encore 
 fever seizes us, and (puts an end to) us : if we had 
 
 prendre eteindre 
 
 recovered, it would have been but to wish a little 
 longer. Women have sometimes a right to com- 
 plain ; but they are always wrong to scold. He 
 thought only of living well, and his fortune, which 
 was not a bad one, furnished him the means (of 
 * See note, page 32, 
 
EXERCISES. 7B 
 
 doing so). I had no sooner alighted, than my friend 
 
 en 
 came 39 to embrace me. He knew 40 how to make 
 the most of his talents. My conversation with him 
 gave 39 me occasion to speak to him of the intention 
 and reasons I had for getting rid of my horse. I 
 
 de 
 told 39 the jockey / left* it to his honesty. My 
 friend took me to a merchant who was the next day 
 to set out on his journey for Flanders. / am too 
 much obliged to my father for having suffered me to 
 depart, to wish to return. I plainly perceived 39 that 
 the landlord was in collusion with the jockey. He 
 was 39 not long before he convinced me I was in the 
 right. The pleasure he evinced 39 at seeing me ; in- 
 duced me to treat him well. He fell upon the 
 chicken, as he had done upon the eggs, and, when 
 he was full to repletion, he told me I was* always 
 to distrust strangers. Trust to me, I will get you 
 out of trouble. With this, he laughed 39 in my face 
 and went away. It was to pump me, that he ad- 
 dressed himself to me. I shut 39 myself up in my 
 room and got into bed. I was not only obliged to 
 agree to whatever he proposed ; but I had also the 
 
 encore 
 mortification to perceive that the scoundrel remem- 
 bered 40 my adventure. / ivas not alone, there were 
 several persons in the coach, and we all soon became 
 acquainted. The next day, he asked me fresh ques- 
 tions. You shall live in abundance, said he, and shall 
 roll in gold and silver. After the Moors had seized on 
 Arragon and almost all Spain, the Christians took 39 
 flight. He told the captain 13 he had just taken some 
 plate from a merchant who was going 31 to Paris. My 
 parents flogged 40 me, when a child, (with emulation) . 
 
 a qui mieux mieux. 
 
 E 
 
74 EXERCISES. 
 
 When my father was flogging me, my mother, as if 
 he had not performed it well, used to join in the 
 
 s'en acquitter 
 sport. We used to lay travellers under contribution, 
 and / was so comfortable, that I would not seek any 
 other way of living : / am, therefore, much obliged to 
 my father for having ill-treated me. They rose from 
 dinner to go to bed. Conquerors seize on the estates 
 of their neighbours. Thieves often take away the 
 life of the innocent. Judges often save the life of 
 the guilty. I made 39 an attempt to escape. I cleared 39 
 away and placed everything in order again. I could 
 not eat, and as / appeared as sad as I had reason 
 to be, they undertook 39 to console me. Thank hea- 
 ven, friend, that you are freed, at once, from the 
 dangers, troubles, and difficulties of life. I put up 
 quietly with this discourse, because it was of no use 
 for me to be angry at it. I was 10 led into a cellar 
 which served as a burying ground for those who 
 
 a 
 died 40 (a) natural death. The bars were so close 
 
 de leur 
 that one 9 could scarcely get one's hand through. My 
 despair will (give) me strength; I shall perhaps 
 
 preter 
 succeed. I mixed with their discourse when I found 
 an opportunity of putting in something witty. I 
 eagerly wish to be one of your companions. All the 
 company applauded this discourse, and it was unani- 
 mously resolved that the honourable situation I 
 (put up for) should be 10 granted me. Let us take 
 demander 
 
 care, said they, to bring him up ourselves to glory. 
 Ah ! replied 39 the poor man, who took care not to 
 understand the true sense of my words, what have 
 you said ? That is what / meant/' He has just 
 
EXERCISES. 75 
 
 committed a robbery, which will send him to the 
 
 /aire 
 galleys. Lay the cloth. You can serve me and you 
 will* not. He nevertheless looted like a complete thief. 
 
 franc 
 I have not received a penny of your money for a 
 long time. When is it daylight in your apartment ? 
 Their servants imitated* them so well, that they 
 might easily have been 10 taken for them. They 
 shot at the people without mercy. He nevertheless 39 
 
 populace 
 heard all that it was of consequence to us that he 
 apprendre 
 
 should 18 not know ; a discontented servant put 39 him 
 up to it. My friend did not let 39 slip so good an 
 
 beau 
 opportunity, to make the most of the letters 13 he had 
 made me write for him. / was 39 not long before I 
 fell asleep. I will keep to the one 13 I have chosen. 
 I hope 13 they will pardon him. The physician de- 
 prived 39 him of his wife, by wishing to rid her of a 
 
 vouloir 
 cough. If any one unluckily happened to touch 
 
 par malheur 
 [upon] that point, he would begin* to weep like 
 
 corde 
 one disconsolate. Whenever his eyes happened* to 
 meet mine, I felt 39 myself seized with inconceivable 
 terror. The affair did 39 not succeed \ I laid it 39 to 
 your brother. I am not yet accustomed to the habits 
 of the English. I want a man who will inquire 
 
 condl. subj. 
 
 diligently respecting his morals, andgive me a faith - 
 
 subj. 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 E 2 
 
76 EXERCISES. 
 
 ful account of them. When my mother was ill, the 
 two most celebrated physicians in London were 10 
 sent for. I nearly cried too, so much was I 
 affected by his tea^. We longed* to hear the 
 touche de 
 
 explanation of the picture. We ardently* wished to 
 hear her relate her story. He had 39 the misfortune 
 to fall into the hands of the king, who was satis- 
 
 entre 
 fed 39 with depriving him of his liberty, to* punish 
 him for his rebellion. He pitied his uncle's fate, 
 although 20 he had no reason to be much afflicted at 
 it. Death will not be long before it puts an end to 
 my torments. Your glory is at stake, not to let the 
 whole kingdom see that you have nattered yourself 
 with a frivolous expectation. If I deceive your ex- 
 pectation, lay it only to yourself. We went 39 thither 
 in a coach, and carried (with us) all the things we 
 
 y 
 
 wanted. Whilst he was having his boots taken off, 
 his page met 39 me on the staircase. You speak 
 openly to me, / am much obliged to you for it. I 
 acted* the footman in that play, and I showed them 
 that I had wit enough to play so fine a part. I 
 
 role 
 was 10 introduced into a study, where i" was not long 
 
 faire entrer 
 before I saw 35 my father make his appearance. Sir, 
 you are certainly in the wrong. That is getting well 
 
 inf. 
 out of a scrape. He was nearly kissing me for joy. 
 We have just got rid of a rival who might have 
 troubled us, that is not amiss. My master sat 39 
 down to dinner with them, and cleverly turned the 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 77 
 
 conversation on his family. He left those drunkards 
 in the hands of the watchmen, who took care to 
 entre 
 
 carry them home. He then asked [for] some paper 
 and ink, and wrote a note which he had carried to 
 its address by his little page. He is not one of those 
 particular masters who find fault with every thing. 
 You must 8 observe your master, and give me an 
 account of all his steps. If you perceive that any 
 of his relations aim at his inheritance, let me know ; 
 
 succession 
 I will soon sink him. You are not satisfied with 
 imposing upon a good old-man ; but to crown your 
 treachery, you are going to put him to death, I am 
 perfidie 
 
 sure that you are guided 11 solely by my interest, 
 and / am much obliged to you for it. After the 
 generosity he has evinced, I should be wrong to 
 mistrust him. How could she have reflected upon it, 
 I did not think of it myself. It ivas in vain for me 
 to make all the inquiries imaginable, I could not 
 find him. Leave it to time. Revenge yourself; do 
 not leave it to laws, which will perhaps deceive your 
 resentment. His other masters could* do no better 
 with him. What do you think of doing with it ? 
 
 Quel 
 The men who accompanied him, took 39 aim at us 
 with some carbines, which they were carrying. My 
 companions had a countenance which bore witness to 
 what was passing within them. As for me, I entered 
 into conversation with the captain. She often had 
 Arabian plays acted before her husband. He 
 
 pieces represent er 
 told me it should not be his fault if we did 18 not see 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
78 EXERCISES. 
 
 each other oftener. He takes after his father [in] 
 that. I take after you a little, I assure you. He 
 gives way to his inclination. He took it into his 
 head to be offended, that I should dare appear in a 
 
 subj. 
 place where he was. He wanted to reproach me ; 
 lieu 
 
 I laughed in his face : he put himself in a passion 
 and gave me a box on the ear. I was obliged to 
 confine myself to the acquaintance of trades-people, 
 
 commerce bourgeois 
 
 which nevertheless hurt me a little at first. It was 
 in vain forme to talk to her, she had made up her 
 mind. It was in vain for me to husband my money, 
 
 menager 
 my purse got empty 39 by degrees, and, at the 
 expiration of three weeks, / had not a penny left. 
 They expected to injure me : they did not however 
 succeed (in doing it). I spared 39 nothing to please 
 
 en 
 him, and succeeded without any difficulty. / went 39 
 to see his father to* (have an explanation) with him. 
 
 s'explicuer 
 I ought to accuse no one but myself, for having 
 placed my confidence in a man 13 I did not know, 
 donner 
 
 and whom / had reason to distrust, after all that had 
 been said to me about him. You ought to have 
 supposed that he would not be long before he (be- 
 imaginer 
 came acquainted with) your treachery. I grant that, 
 
 savoir 
 and I intended 40 to disappear as soon as possible, 
 proposer 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 79 
 
 for I ardently* desired to see Madrid again. We 
 deceived* 9 every body by the parties 13 we gave. 40 
 
 fetes 
 God forbid that we should confound guilt with 
 
 subj. crime 
 
 innocence. The conformity in the proper names of 
 the Claudian family shows that they were all the 
 
 Claude 
 eldest sons of their families. The Romans resolved 39 
 to take satisfaction for the pillage which the Veii 
 
 Veiens 
 had made on the Roman territory. The Roman 
 generals, rather than discontinue the siege, had 
 lodgings constructed to* shelter the soldiers from 
 
 sing, 
 the inclemency of winter. It was resolved (to put 
 rigueurs donner 
 
 upon full pay) all those who should come to 
 
 la paie a 
 the siege. The loss which had just been sus- 
 tained only increased the ardour of all classes for 
 the continuation of the siege. The tribunes 39 
 threatened the generals to have them arrested, and 
 represented to the people, that they ought to show 
 that they were not capable of suffering themselves 
 to be deceived by so palpable an artifice ; that the 
 
 grossier 
 Sergii and Virginii ought to be deprived 10 of the so- 
 vereign authority and the principal dignities of the 
 republic, (which ought to be) transferred to the ple- 
 
 pour f aire passer 
 
 beians, worthy of those honourable posts ! They had 
 
 plebeians nominated for military tribunes. In the 
 
 ceremony of Lectisternium, the statues of the Gods 
 
 Lectisterne 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
80 EXERCISES. 
 
 were 10 served with magnificent repasts for a week, 
 
 pendant 
 as if they had been able to avail themselves of them ; 
 prisoners were set 10 at liberty, and they 9 would have 
 scrupled to have them arrested after the festival was 
 over. Those only were pardoned who were found 
 unarmed. Camillus, who had hut just ended his dic- 
 
 sortir de la 
 tatorship, opposed the proposition of T. SiciniusDen- 
 tatus, of making a second Rome of the city of Veii. 
 There was no possibility of forcing the soldiers to 
 
 sing, 
 bring back articles, which they had either used 41 or 
 
 consume 
 got rid of. They had recourse to colonies to* get rid 
 of turbulent and restless young men. Brennus de- 
 
 remuant une jeunesse 
 
 clared that he was angry with the Romans only. 149 
 M. Manlius alone faces the enemy. He began to 
 flatter the people, as a tribune might have done, he 
 sold his estates to acquit their debts, and declared 
 that (as long as) he had a penny left, he would not 
 
 tant que 
 suffer his fellow-citizens to be put 10 into prison. 
 
 fers 
 The senate and the people were separated, like two 
 factions, ready to come to acts of violence. Manlius, 
 as it respected a capital crime, appeared 39 before his 
 judges clothed in black; he laid bare his bosom, 
 
 de deuil 
 which he showed all covered with the wounds 13 he 
 had received 41 in battle. The people could not re- 
 
 les combats 
 solve to use all the severity of the laws against a 
 de 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 81 
 
 man who had just saved the republic. He showed 
 them that Cotta and Manlius Aquilius had escaped 
 the rigour of the law by the bribery of their judges. 
 I pretended 39 at first not to perceive his design. 
 Thinking that he ought not to confine himself to 
 that, he openly abused me in the street. He was 
 ashamed to let me see his weakness. He was afraid 
 of drawing upon himself the resentment of the king. 
 That news hurt me as much as if the accident had 
 happened to myself. Imagining 13 my honour was 
 at stake, I formed the design of calling him (out) . 
 
 en duel 
 The gentleman you have just seen at the castle is my 
 uncle. If you are not satisfied, and if you wish we 
 should come to blows, you have only to speak. After 
 what you have just (told) me you are no longer my 
 
 apprendre 
 enemy. I was too hasty to put up with insults which a 
 
 vif injures 
 
 sensible man, in my place, would only have laughed 
 at. I thanked Heaven I was out of that (dilemma). 
 
 mauvais pas 
 I asked him respectfully what was the matter with him. 
 If I had been firm, I should not have lost my place. ♦ 
 He made 39 me restore all the money 13 1 had received. 
 What 5 could I have done, at the age I was ? His 
 lordship was 39 not long before he returned. His lord- 
 ship had me called very early. He was not satisfied 
 with asking me what my name was ; but he wished 
 to know the names of all my relations. / shall leave 
 it to your judgment. They were not ashamed to 
 commit meannesses to* procure my good-will. / 
 faire capter bienveillance 
 
 could scarcely believe 13 they were Englishmen I 
 
 subj. 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 E 5 
 
82 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 nevertheless served them, without being the dupe of 
 their interested politeness. God forbid that I should 
 be offended at your boldness. I did not tell him a 
 single word of what had just passed between his 
 master and me. Whilst I was relating it to him, my 
 pretended friend went away without* bidding me 
 good-bye, I had sold my horse, thinking that I should 
 no longer want it. / made up my mind to take a 
 furnished room and to go afterwards to London. I was 
 so irritated against the archbishop, that the frugality 
 
 pique 
 of my inn appeared to me preferable to the good 
 living 13 we had at his house. I only laughed at his 
 ingratitude. During the play I did nothing but ponder 
 
 rever 
 on the news I had just heard. / had reason to be- 
 lieve that [the] sight (of me) would not please him 
 
 ma 
 much. Having reason to be dissatisfied with me, I 
 judged that he might pretend not to know me. I had 
 so great a mind to laugh, when I heard him finish 
 his story, that I had 39 not a little difficulty to pre- 
 vent myself from it ; I however succeeded 39 If / 
 have reason, for the future, as I hope I shall, to be 
 satisfied with him, / will enable him to live at his 
 ease. He began 39 laughing like a madman, and I 
 could not help following his example,and, when we had 
 sufficiently indulged ourselves, he said to me, Confess 
 
 bien 
 that we have just been acting a droll play; but / did 
 
 jouer plaisant 
 not expect the conclusion. / bid 39 him good-bye and 
 went away. He (guessed) that / had no objection to 
 
 penser bien 
 make my escape. Do not be offended at my taking 
 * See note, page 27. 
 
EXERCISES. 83 
 
 you to Italy, we shall be able there to shelter our- 
 selves from the resentment of your enemies. I 
 will turn spy. I plainly perceived 40 / had to 
 do with a rogue. He soon showed 39 me that I 
 had not been mistaken. I had no reason to repent 
 of having made such an acquaintance. If it be agree- 
 able to you, we will go to-morrow and look at the 
 estate I have just bought. I spent all the money 
 / had left. We 9 consult nothing but ambition and 
 interest, when it respects establishing ourselves. It 
 was of no use for me to tell him what (would be the 
 
 s'ensuivre 
 consequences) of his conduct; he had made up his 
 mind, I (put on) (in their company) a reserve which 
 
 garder avec euoc 
 blinded them, I got acquainted with a man, who 
 pretended to be a lord. They began 39 all to speak 
 together. He is coming with four of his friends, and 
 
 17 va venir 
 it will be your fault if you do not make the sixth. I 
 found him so foolish, that I could not help laughing 
 in his face, I do not want to see any more. He 
 fetched a deep sigh, and said to me, Instead of envy- 
 ing me, you ought to pity me, for having given my- 
 self so much trouble to make myself unhappy. You 
 have scarcely any more misfortunes to put up with. 
 He bid 39 me good-bye, and left me thinking of what 
 
 occupe 
 he had just told me. I got into bed; but could not 
 sleep. It was in vain for me to try to please ; he 
 was never satisfied. After a severe examination, I 
 agreed with myself that if I was not a rogue, I was 
 not far off, I represented to myself that they would 
 not be long before they discovered my fraud. I told 
 him 13 his generous master had just made me a pre- 
 
84 EXERCISES. 
 
 sent of a purse of sixty guineas. I entered his house, 
 
 dans 
 to* give him an account of what I had done ; but 
 he had just stept out. I went to my inn after the 
 
 sortir 
 conversation I had just had with those gentlemen, 
 who told me I was anything but an honest man. 
 I thought of nothing but of escaping with my 
 household gods, I mean my clothes. The time 13 I 
 penates hardes 
 
 had left seemed very long. I nevertheless went and 15 
 supped at my inn. I expected to be beat to death. 
 
 etre tue a coups de baton 
 I reflected that I mightf rise at court. He was 
 
 se pousser 
 a man about sixty years old, of gigantic stature, 
 and extremely thin ; he wore large mustachios ; he 
 
 epais sing, 
 told me that what dwelt most on his mind, was his 
 having dissipated considerable wealth in his cam- 
 paigns. / look as if I should return as I came. He 
 soon got rid of his modesty. It was in vain for us 
 
 honte 
 both (to exhaust) our wit in scattering the flowers of 
 
 mettre a bout 
 rhetoric in our memorials. It was sowing on sand, 
 
 placet 
 as the saying is ; whatever turn we took to% make 
 
 subj. 
 the most q/'his services, the court paid no attention 
 to it. 14 If you want a person who has some interest, 
 
 subj. 
 do not spare me, I shall always be delighted to do a 
 
 * See note second, page 3. f See note, page 32. 
 
 % See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 85 
 
 kindness to an honest man ; you have only 149 to tell 
 me what it is about. We had soon put him up to 
 it, and he assured 39 us, we should soon hear from 
 him. I do not depend much on the zeal 13 he has 
 just evinced for me. I applauded what he said. As 
 for me, I assure you, I will [have] nolhing ; but it 
 is not (so) ivith those gentlemen, they are rather 
 
 de meme 
 Jewish when it respects obliging their neighbours. I 
 would trust your word ; but you have to do with a 
 person naturally mistrustful. Give her the money 13 
 you are going to receive. Give me an account of all 
 that has happened to you. You are right, I only 
 busy myself about what pleases me. I have to do 
 with people who are not so very particular. He began 
 to laugh at my expense. After all, we are better than 
 they. They look like two madmen. There was no 
 need of our approaching them, to hear what they 
 were saying, and we soon joined the sport. He is a 
 young man who affects the manners of a lord. You 
 know the Spaniards, said he, they set no value on an 
 honest man, if he has the misfortune to be deficient 
 in fortune or birth. / had made up my mind (to be 
 out of a situation) a little while longer. He was 
 
 battre le pave 
 nevertheless the delight of his master. It will be 
 your fault if you do not succeed. You may be one 
 of my secretaries if you like. I am not afraid of 
 incurring reproaches. He had his steward called, 
 and told me to follow him, that he had just received 
 orders that concerned me. I had my clothes carried 
 
 regarder 
 to my new abode. I want a good servant. j 
 suspect 13 my valet and my steward are in collu- 
 sion. (Take) the trouble to be to-morrow morn- 
 
 se donner 
 
86 EXERCISES. 
 
 ing near the Diorama. His lordship wished to send 
 them both away ; but after having reflected a little, 
 he was satisfied with getting rid of the steward, whose 
 situation he gave me. I threatened 39 to turn them 
 out of doors. What cruelly mortified him, were the 
 contradictions he had to put up with (from me), 
 
 de ma part 
 whenever it respected giving me an account of his ex- 
 penses. He did not quit the Sicilian lord's service; 
 no doubt that, in spite of all he had to put up with, 
 he still found it worth his while. He was ashamed 
 of having given me (in vain) a [piece of] bad 
 
 inutilement 
 advice. He no sooner heard of this misfortune, 
 than laying it to every one, he nearly made 
 (a clearance of the house) . I should be wrong not to 
 
 maison nette 
 believe the relation of Suetonius, who says, that 
 
 Suetone 
 Caligula was so fond of his horse, that he gave 39 him 
 a house richly furnished, with officers to* serve him, 
 and that he wished 40 even to make a consul of him. 
 He knows how to make the most of his wares. We 
 had a dispute when it respected payment. I confess 
 I was wrong to give way to sorrow. When / had got 
 rid of him, I went away. My employment consisted 
 in visitingf our farms, in having repairs done, in 
 a 
 
 receiving money from the farmers, and I gave 40 [in 
 my] accounts every month to the Secretary. The 
 public sometimes murmur at it ; but that is w T hat he 
 gives himself very little trouble about. Your Excel- 
 lency ordered me (to be sincere) : I have obeyed 
 avoir de la franchise 
 
 * See note second, page 3. + See note, page 27. 
 
EXERCISES. 87 
 
 you. / am much obliged to you for it, replied he. 
 lui 
 
 The King has sometimes these registers read to him. 
 He entered to* see how I was setting about it. I 
 took great care to (tell) him who I was. I was 
 
 apprendre 
 afraid to (call for) anything that savoured [of] 
 
 demander 
 parsimony. I became acquainted with him that very 
 evening. We sat down to supper. It teas in vain 
 for me to be in a good bed, I could not sleep. / 
 confined myself to the advice 13 my friend had given 
 me; and as I stood in need of him, I went to his 
 house early the next morning. I spared nothing 
 to please him : but he minded so little all that I did, 
 that I despaired of success. Try to profit by the 
 advice 13 I have just given you. He loaded me with 
 civilities ; but, I assure you, he had not to do with a 
 fool. He held in his hand a paper, which he pre- 
 tended to be reading. 31 He was not long before he 
 found an opportunity of revenging himself. When 
 it only respects trifles, I shall not be so particular , but 
 when you want the government of a city, you will be 
 
 vouioir 
 satisfied, if you please, with half the profit, and 
 (account) to me for the other. What completed 
 tenir compte 
 
 my pride, was the minister's thinking proper that my 
 servant should wear his livery. I was nearly think- 
 ing myself a relative of his. I had an anonymous 
 letter delivered to him. My servant treated, in the 
 same manner, those who addressed themselves to 
 him. My pretended friend, who expected anything 
 but to see me, was confused, and wanted to go away. 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
88 EXERCISES. 
 
 I expected* to die. I did it to see if there were not 
 some seeds of ambition left in you. My conscience 
 secretly reproached me of it. It was in vain for 
 Sangrado to see twenty persons die under his hands; 
 
 entre 
 he was so convinced of the excellence of bleeding* in 
 the arm, and frequent drinking,* that instead of 
 laying it to his remedies, he thought 40 his patients 
 died 40 for want of having drunk enough, and of 
 having been sufficiently bled. It was of no use my 
 telling him that, he took no notice of it at all. What 
 
 compte 
 do you mean by credulity ? / mean an inclination 
 to believe whatever is told 10 us. How old are you ? 
 / am sixteen. I did not think you [were] so old. 
 For my part, I am one-and-thirty. Is your mother 
 very old ? She is almost eighty. Are you cold in 
 that corner? No, not at all; I am quite warm, on 
 the contrary. Are you thirsty ? No ; but I am 
 very cold, and very hungry. You are hungry, you 
 say, and I am very tired, and very dry. You have a 
 sore nose, you say ; I wish you had a sore tongue. 
 My feet are so cold, that I cannot feel them. If 
 they should happen to quarrel, let me know it. Last 
 w r eek a fire broke out in our neighbour's house : they 
 say that the servant fell asleep before she put out 
 her candle, and that the cat (knocked) it down 
 
 faire tomber 
 among some shavings, which set the house on fire. 
 
 * Use a substantive. 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 There are four conjugations, distinguished by the 
 termination of the Infinitive mood. 
 
 The first ends in .... er. 
 
 The second ends in . . . ir. 
 
 The third ends in . . . oir. 
 
 The fourth ends in . . . re. 
 
 USE OF THE FOLLOWING TABLES. 
 
 If the verb you want to conjugate be in the table 
 of verbs, you will immediately see its primitive 
 tenses; if not, its termination will show to which 
 conjugation it belongs, and by changing that termi- 
 nation as directed in the table, you will obtain the 
 other primitive tenses ; then refer to the formation 
 of tenses for the tense you want, and if not ac- 
 quainted with the persons of the tense, refer to the 
 table of the formation of persons : — Ex : I want the 
 first person plural of the pres. subj. of the verb 
 perdre : not finding it in the table of verbs, I see by 
 its termination re that it belongs to the fourth con- 
 jugation, and is therefore like vendre ; and by 
 changing re into ant, u, s, is, I have perdre, pendant, 
 perdu, jeperdsjeperdis, all the primitive tenses; I then 
 find, by referring to the formation of tenses, that the 
 pres. subj. being formed from the pres. participle, 
 perdant, Que je perde will be the tense I want; and 
 lastly, referring to the table of the formation of per- 
 sons, I find the terminations of the subj. pres. to be 
 e — es — e — ions — iez — ent, the person I want, being 
 the first person plural, will therefore be que nous 
 perdions. 
 
90 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 A TABLE OF PRIMITIVE TENSES. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pres of Participle Participle Pres. of Pret. of 
 
 the inf. pres. past. the ind. the ind. 
 
 Port-er Port-ant Port-£ Je porte Je port-ai 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Fin-ir Fin-issant Fin-i Je fin-is Je fin-is 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Rec-evoir Rec-evant Rec-u Je rec-ois Je rec-us 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Vend-re Vend-ant Vend-u Je vend-s Je vend-is 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 *Aller Allant A116 Je vais 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 J'allai 
 
 *Acquerir 
 
 Acquerant 
 
 Acquis 
 
 J'acquiers 
 
 J 'acquis 
 
 Bouillirf 
 
 Bouillant 
 
 Bouilli 
 
 Je bous 
 
 Je bouillis 
 
 *Courir 
 
 Courant 
 
 Couru 
 
 Je cours 
 
 Je courus 
 
 *Cueiller 
 
 Cueillant 
 
 Ceuilli 
 
 Je cueille 
 
 Je cueillis 
 
 Fuir 
 
 Fuyant 
 
 Pui 
 
 Je fuis 
 
 Je fuis 
 
 Faillir 
 
 Faillant 
 
 Failli 
 
 Je faux 
 
 Je faillis 
 
 *Mourir 
 
 Mourant 
 
 Mort 
 
 Je meurs 
 
 Je mourus 
 
 OuvrirJ 
 
 Ouvrant 
 
 Ouvert 
 
 J'ouvre 
 
 J'ouvris 
 
 Saillir 
 
 Saillant 
 
 Sailli 
 
 II saille 
 
 11 saillit 
 
 Tenir 
 
 Tenant 
 
 Term 
 
 Je tiens 
 
 Je tins 
 
 VStir 
 
 Vetant 
 
 Vetu 
 
 Je vets 
 
 Je vetis 
 
 Tressaillir 
 
 Tressaillant Tressailli 
 
 Je tressaille Je tressailli s 
 
 *Sentir§ 
 
 Sentant 
 
 Senti 
 
 Je sens 
 
 Je sentis 
 
 * The verbs marked with an asterisk are irregularly formed 
 in some of their tenses, and will be found among the excep- 
 tions page 92 or 93. 
 
 f The verb bouiller is generally used after /aire, see page 
 23 ; we say however Veau bout, the water boils. 
 
 X Verbs in frir belong to this branch. 
 
 § Verbs in mir and vir belong to this termination. 
 

 
 TABLES. 
 
 
 yi 
 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 Pres. of the 
 
 infinitive. 
 ♦Avoir 
 ♦S'asseoir 
 
 Participle 
 present. 
 Ayant 
 Asseyant 
 
 Participle 
 past. 
 Eu 
 
 Assis 
 
 Pres. of the 
 indicative. 
 J'ai 
 Je m'assieds 
 
 Preterit of 
 the indicat. 
 
 J'eus 
 
 Je m'assis 
 
 ♦D-evoir 
 
 D-evant 
 
 D-u 
 
 Je d-ois 
 
 Je d-us 
 
 ♦Mouvoir 
 
 Mouvant 
 
 Mu 
 
 Je meus 
 
 Je mus 
 
 ♦Pleuvoir 
 
 Pleuvant 
 
 Plu 
 
 11 pleut 
 
 11 pint 
 
 ♦Pouvoir 
 
 Pouvant 
 
 Pu 
 
 Je puis 
 
 Je pus 
 
 Pourvoir 
 ♦Savoir 
 
 Pourvoyant 
 Sachant 
 
 Pourvu 
 Su 
 
 Je pourvois 
 Je sais 
 
 Je pourvus 
 Je sus 
 
 ♦Valoir 
 
 Valant 
 
 Valu 
 
 Je vaux 
 
 Je valus 
 
 ♦Voir 
 ♦Vouloir 
 
 Voyant 
 Voulant 
 
 Vu 
 Voulu 
 
 Je vois 
 Je veux 
 
 Je vis 
 Je voulus 
 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 Battre 
 
 Battant 
 
 Battu 
 
 Je bats 
 
 Je battis 
 
 ♦Boire 
 
 Buvant 
 
 Bu 
 
 Je bois 
 
 Je bus 
 
 Circoncire 
 
 Circoncisant Circoncis 
 
 Je circoncis 
 
 Je circoncis 
 
 Clore clorre 
 
 Closant 
 
 Clos 
 
 Je clos 
 
 Je closis 
 
 Conclure 
 
 Concluant 
 
 Conclu 
 
 Je conclus 
 
 Je conclus 
 
 Confire 
 
 Confisant 
 
 Confit 
 
 Je confis 
 
 Je confis 
 
 Coudre 
 
 Cousant 
 
 Cousu 
 
 Je couds 
 
 Je cousis 
 
 Croire 
 
 Croyant 
 
 Cm 
 
 Je crois 
 
 Je crus 
 
 ♦Dire 
 
 Disant 
 
 Dit 
 
 Je dis 
 
 Je dis 
 
 E'-crire 
 
 E'-crivant 
 
 E'-crit 
 
 J'e-cris 
 
 J'e-crivis 
 
 ♦Etre 
 
 E'tant 
 
 E'te 
 
 Je suis 
 
 Je fus 
 
 Ex-clure 
 
 Ex-cluant 
 
 Ex-clu 
 
 J'ex-clus 
 
 J'ex-clus 
 
 ♦Faire 
 
 Fesant 
 
 Fait 
 
 Je fais 
 
 Je fis 
 
 Joi-ndre 
 Lire 
 
 Joi-gnant 
 Lisant 
 
 Joi-nt 
 Lu 
 
 Je joi-ns 
 Je lis 
 
 Je joi-gnis 
 Je lus 
 
 Maudire 
 
 Maudissant 
 
 Maudit 
 
 Je maudis 
 
 Je maudis 
 
 Mettre 
 
 Mettant 
 
 Mis 
 
 Je mets 
 
 Je mis 
 
 Moudre 
 
 Moulant 
 
 Moulu 
 
 Je mouds 
 
 Je moulus 
 
 Naitre 
 
 Naissant 
 
 Ne 
 
 Je nais 
 
 Je naquis 
 
 Par-aitref 
 
 Par-aissant 
 
 Par-u 
 
 Je par-ais 
 
 Je par-us 
 
 Pl-aire 
 
 Pl-aisant 
 
 Pl-u 
 
 Je pl-ais 
 
 Je pl-us 
 
 ♦Prendre 
 
 Prenant 
 
 Pris 
 
 Je prends 
 
 Je pris 
 
 Red-uiret 
 
 Red-uisant 
 
 Red-uit 
 
 Je red-uis 
 
 Je red-uisis 
 
 R6-soudre 
 
 Re-solvant 
 
 R6-sous§ 
 
 Je re-sous 
 
 Je re-solus 
 
 Rire 
 
 Riant 
 
 Ri 
 
 Je ris 
 
 Je ris 
 
 Rompre 
 SufF-ire 
 
 Rompant 
 SufF-isant 
 
 Rompu 
 Suff-i 
 
 Je romps 
 Je sufF-is 
 
 Je rompis 
 Je sufF-is 
 
 Suivre 
 
 Suivant 
 
 Suivi 
 
 Je suis 
 
 Je suivis 
 
 Vaincre 
 Vend-re 
 
 Vain quant 
 Vend-ant 
 
 Vaincu 
 Ven d-u 
 
 Je vaincs 
 Je vend-s 
 
 Je vainquis 
 Je vend-is 
 
 Vivre 
 
 Vivant 
 
 Vecu 
 
 Je vis 
 
 Je vecus 
 
 t Verbs in oitre belong to tbis termination. 
 
 Nuire and luire make in the past participle nui and < 
 
92 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 A TABLE OF THE FORMATION OF THE 
 TENSES. 
 
 THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, 
 
 Although a Primitive Tense, forms its three persons Plural 
 from the Present Participle, by changing ant into ons, ez, ent. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 Pres. of the Participle First 
 
 injin. 
 
 Aller 
 
 Allant 
 
 Avoir 
 
 Ay ant 
 
 Acquerir 
 
 Acquerant 
 
 Boire 
 
 Buvant 
 
 Diref 
 
 Disant 
 
 Etre 
 
 Etant 
 
 Faire 
 
 Fesant 
 
 Mouvoir 
 
 Mouvant 
 
 Mourir 
 
 Mourant 
 
 Pouvoir 
 
 Pouvant 
 
 Prendre 
 
 Prenant 
 
 DevoirJ 
 
 D-evant 
 
 Savoir 
 
 Sachant 
 
 Tenir 
 
 Tenant 
 
 Venir 
 
 Venant 
 
 Vouloir 
 
 Voulant 
 
 present, person. 
 
 Avons 
 
 Second 
 person. 
 
 Sommes 
 
 Savons 
 
 Avez 
 
 Dites 
 
 Etes 
 Faites 
 
 Savez 
 
 Third 
 person. 
 
 Vont 
 
 Opt <H, & 
 
 Acquierjfoit 
 Boivent 
 
 Sont 
 
 Font 
 
 Meuvent 
 
 Meurent 
 
 Peuvent 
 
 Prennent 
 
 D-oivent 
 
 Savent 
 
 Tiennent 
 
 Viennent 
 
 Veulent 
 
 IMPERFECT OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 This Tense is formed from the Present Participle, by chang- 
 ing ant into ais. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Present infinitive. Present Participle. Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 Avoir. Ay ant. J'avais. 
 
 Savoir 
 
 Sachant 
 
 Je savais. 
 
 THE PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 This is a Primitive Tense. 
 
 f Redire is the only compound of dire that has the same 
 exception. 
 
 X This applies to all verbs in evoir. 
 
TABLES. 
 
 93 
 
 THE FUTURE 
 
 Is formed from the Present Infinitive, by changing the final r 
 or re into rai. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 sent Infinitive. 
 
 Future Indicative, 
 
 Aller 
 
 J'irai 
 
 Acquerir 
 
 J'acquerrai 
 
 Avoir 
 
 J'aurai 
 
 Courir 
 
 Je courrai 
 
 Cueillir 
 
 Je cueillerai 
 
 Etre 
 
 Je serai 
 
 Envoyer 
 
 J'enverrai 
 
 Faire 
 
 Je ferai 
 
 Mourir 
 
 Je mourrai 
 
 Mouvoir 
 
 Je mouvrai 
 
 Pouvoir 
 
 Je pourrai 
 
 Pleuvoir 
 
 11 pleuvra 
 
 Recevoir 
 
 Je recevrai 
 
 Savoir 
 
 Je saurai 
 
 S'asseoir 
 
 Je m'assierai 
 
 Tenir 
 
 Je tiendrai. 
 
 Voir 
 
 Je verrai 
 
 Vouloir 
 
 Je voudrai 
 
 Valoir 
 
 Je vaudrai 
 
 THE CONDITIONAL 
 
 Is formed from the Future by adding s. 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD 
 
 Is the same as the Present of the Indicative, by leaving out 
 the Pronouns, except the Third Persons, which are always 
 the same as the Third Persons of the Present Subjunctive. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Infinitive present. 
 
 Indicative present. 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 Aller 
 
 Je vais 
 
 Va 
 
 Avoir 
 
 J'ai 
 
 Aie 
 
 Etre 
 
 Je suis 
 
 Sois 
 
 Savoir 
 
 Je sais 
 
 Sache 
 
94 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 THE PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Is formed from the Present Participle, by changing ant into e. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Infinitive present. 
 Avoir 
 Aller 
 
 Present participle. 
 A yant 
 Allant 
 
 Present subjunctive 
 Que j'aie* 
 Que j'aille* 
 
 Acquerir 
 Boire 
 
 Acquerant 
 Buvant 
 
 Que j'acquiere* 
 Que je boive* 
 
 Etre 
 
 Etant 
 
 Que je sois* 
 
 Faire 
 
 Fesant 
 
 Que je fasse 
 
 Mouvoir 
 
 Mouvant 
 
 Que je meuve* 
 
 Mourir 
 
 Mourant 
 
 Que je meure* 
 
 Pouvoir 
 
 Pouvant 
 
 Que je puisse 
 
 Prendre 
 
 Prenant 
 
 Que je prenne* 
 
 Recevoir 
 
 Recevant 
 
 Que je recoive* 
 
 Tenir 
 
 Tenant 
 
 Que je tienne* 
 
 Valoir 
 
 Valant 
 
 Que je vaille* 
 
 Vouloir 
 
 Voulant 
 
 Que je veuille 
 
 THE IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Is formed from the Preterit Definite, by changing ai into 
 asse, for the First Conjugation; and by adding se for the 
 three others. — There are no Exceptions. 
 
 THE COMPOUND TENSES 
 
 Are formed from the Past Participle with the different Tenses 
 of the verbs avoir and etre. 
 
 * The verbs marked with an asterisk are regularly formed 
 in the First and Second Persons plural. 
 
TABLES. 
 
 9S 
 
 A TABLE OF THE FORMATION OF THE 
 PERSONS. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 1 per. 
 
 2 per. 3 per. 
 
 1 per. 
 
 2 per. 
 
 3 per. 
 
 
 e 
 
 es e 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s t 
 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 X 
 
 x t 
 
 ons 
 
 ez 
 
 ent 
 
 Tense 
 
 cs 
 ds 
 ts 
 
 cs c 
 ds d 
 ts t 
 
 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 ais 
 
 ais ait 
 
 ions 
 
 iez 
 
 aient 
 
 
 ai 
 
 as a 
 
 ames 
 
 ates 
 
 erent 
 
 Preterit 
 
 is 
 us 
 
 is it 
 us ut 
 
 imes 
 umes 
 
 ites 
 utes 
 
 irent 
 urent 
 
 
 ins 
 
 ins int 
 
 inmes 
 
 intes 
 
 inrent 
 
 Future 
 
 ra 
 
 rez 
 
 ront 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present I rais rais rait I rions riez raient 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present | e es e | ions iez ent 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 asse asses at 
 
 isse isses it 
 
 usse usses ut 
 
 insse insses int 
 
 assions assiez assent 
 
 issions issiez issent 
 
 ussions ussiez ussent 
 
 inssions inssiez inssent 
 
RULES WITH EXERCISES 
 
 PECULIAR TO THE 
 
 COLLOQUIAL STYLE. 
 
 Rule 1. — The simplest form of putting a question, 
 m French, is by placing the pronominal nominative 
 case after the verb, as : — 
 
 Do you understand ? Comprenez-vous 1 
 
 Rule 2. — When the nominative is a noun, the 
 noun is placed first, and the pronoun ^7, elle, Us, or 
 elles, after the verb, according to the gender and 
 number of the noun, as : — 
 
 Is your servant returned ? Votre domestique est-il revenu ? 
 Are your daughters married ? Vos Jilles sont-elles mariees ? 
 
 Rule 3. — To mark surprise or doubt, the interro- 
 gation is made by Est-ce que ? leaving the nomina- 
 tive before the verb, as : — - 
 
 Do you suspect me ? Est-ce que vous me soupconnez ? 
 Is he going too? Est-ce quit y va aussi? 
 Is your brother ill ? Est-ce que votre frere est malade ? 
 Is your brother going too? Est-ce que votre frere y va 
 
EXERCISES. 97 
 
 Rule 4. — When a negation accompanies the ques- 
 tion, which the speaker asks merely to have what he 
 thinks, confirmed, the form used is, N'est-ce pas 
 que ? as : 
 
 Am I not sixteen ? N'est-ce pas que jai seize ans ? 
 Is not your brother very tall ? N'est-ce pas que voire ft ere 
 est bien grand ? 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 
 Do you take 1 chocolate? Are you drinking 3 tea? 
 Have 3 I any thing on my face ? Is 4 not that apple 
 very sweet ? Can 1 you lend me some money ? Is 4 
 it not very warm to-day? Shall I tell 1 you the 
 truth ? Are 3 you thirsty already ? Do your parents 
 live 3 in this street ? Are 3 you afraid of dying ? 
 Do you believe 3 that? It is very cold, is 4 it not? 
 Is 2 your father still alive? Are 2 your sons re- 
 turned ? Shall 3 we go to the play this evening ? 
 Do not I look 4 pale ? Do you think, 3 too, that I 
 am 19 wrong? Have you seen 1 my father? Has 
 your brother done 3 his exercise? Has my father 
 spoken 3 to you about it ? Do not the French 
 eat 4 frogs ? Are 3 they good to eat ? Do you 
 really think 3 I can 19 do it ? Does he not look 4 ill ? 
 Do you think 1 I am 13 making any improvement ? 
 Are 3 (all) well at home ? Is 10 soup taken 3 
 
 tout le monde 
 every day in France? Are you fond of (baked) 
 
 cuit 
 apples ? Are 4 we not cousins ? Did your friend 
 lend 3 you the money 13 you wanted?* Are you 
 tired 3 already ? Have you seen 1 the king ? 
 
 * To want, is often expressed by faiilir y as, I want money, 
 il mefaut de V argent. 
 
 F 
 
98 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 5. When an interrogative sentence begins 
 with what ? without a substantive, use Qu'est-ce qui 
 if in the nominative, and Qu' est-ce que if in the ob- 
 jective case; when it begins with who? use Qui 
 est-ce qui ? when with whom ? use Qui, or Qui est-ce 
 que ? as : 
 
 Who is talking ? Qui est-ce quiparle ? 
 What do you say ? Qu est-ce que vous dites ? 
 What makes him sad? Qu' est-ce qui le rend triste ? 
 Whom have you mentioned ? Qui, or Qui est-ce que 
 vous avez nomme° ? 
 
 Rule 6. — If, however, the following verb should 
 require the preposition a or de, the sentence, or 
 member of sentence, must begin with a or de, as : 
 
 What are you thinking of? A quoi pensez-vous? 
 What is it about? De quoi s'agit-il ? 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 
 Who 5 told you so ? What 5 have you done ? 
 Who 5 is knocking ? What 5 do you mean ? What 8 
 are you speaking about ? What 6 is he amusing 
 himself at ? What 5 are you doing ? Who 5 is calling 
 me ? What 5 do you want ? What 5 is he going to 
 do ? What 5 did he say ? What 6 (is the use of) 
 
 servir 
 that ? What 6 are you playing at ? Who 5 will have 
 this apple ? Who 5 will come with me ? What 5 do 
 you want with me ? What 5 is the matter with you ? 
 What 6 are you complaining of ? What 6 is he busy 
 about ? What 5 have you done to your brother ? 
 Whom 6 is he making game of? Whom 6 is he 
 addressing himself to ? Whom 6 does he complain 
 of? What 5 will my father say? What 5 did they 9 
 say to you? What 5 are you eating ? What 5 has 
 
EXERCISES. 99 
 
 your brother done with his money? What 5 has 
 that to do with my voyage ? What does that mean ? 
 What 5 have you been doing since yesterday ? What 6 
 are you meddling with ? What 6 do you spend 
 your time at? What 6 is he thinking of? What 6 
 did you make use of? Whom 6 have you to do 
 with ? Whom 6 are you asking that question of ? 
 Whom 5 did I frighten? What 5 did your brother 
 say ? What 5 would you have me do ? What 5 have 
 you to say to me ? What 5 have you been pur- 
 chasing ? What 5 have you done to your brother ? 
 Who 5 will have a glass of wine ? 
 prendre 
 
 Rule 7. — The word must, or to be obliged to } is 
 expressed, in French, in the following manner, and 
 requires the following verb to be put in the subjunc- 
 tive mood : 
 
 See observation under Rule 17. 
 
 I am obliged to, or must // faut que je. 
 
 Thou must II faut que tu. 
 
 He must II faut quil. 
 
 We must // faut que nous. 
 
 You must II faut que vous. 
 
 They must II faut qu'ils. 
 
 Rule 8. — When the following verb is reflective, it 
 is better to put it in the infinitive, w T hen the pro- 
 noun sufficiently marks the person. This rule will 
 also apply when the expression is indefinite, as : 
 
 You must get up 11 faut vous lever. 
 
 We must assist one another II faut sentr 'aider. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 
 I must 7 go away. She must 7 do her duty. Why 
 must 7 I be silent ? How much must 7 1 give you ? 
 f2 
 
100 EXERCISES. 
 
 We must 8 make haste. He must 7 have made great 
 haste. I must 7 make haste. You must 8 come and 
 see me. You must 8 not do so. You must 8 fetch 
 me that directly. We must 8 go to bed. We must 8 
 not be angry without reason. We must 8 never 
 despair. What must 7 I do ? Where must 7 I go ? 
 What must 7 I learn? Man must 7 labour. Best 
 friends must 7 part. Children must 7 obey. The 
 laws must 7 be obeyed. We must 8 die. I must 7 
 pay my debts. Death must 7 come. We must 8 eat. 
 When we are young, we must 8 learn. Must 7 I do 
 all that to-day ? Must 7 I always be unhappy ? 
 He must 7 be very wicked. Must I always tell you 
 
 fut. 
 the same thing? He will be obliged 7 to pay me. 
 Am I obliged 7 to do it ? If I go out with you, I 
 must put 7 on my hat. I must 7 send this letter to 
 the post. I must 7 get my coat mended. I must 7 
 beg some pins. The dinner must 7 be ready. They 
 must 7 be very fond of each other. I shall be obliged 
 to punish you. I must 7 go and bid my mother 
 good-bye. You must 8 take great care of your 
 
 bien 
 clothes. He must 7 be at least ninety years old. It 
 must 7 be very dirty in the streets. I must 7 send for 
 him from Rome. You must 8 pay more attention. 
 You must not frighten children. I must 7 get a pair 
 of shoes made. You must 7 set a great value indeed 
 upon my presents, to give them away, in that man- 
 ner, for nothing. 
 
 Rule 9. — The word people, the pronouns we, you, 
 they, and one, used indefinitely, are expressed, in 
 French, by on, as : 
 
 They say On dit. 
 
EXERCISES. 101 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 
 What will people say ? I do not care what people 
 will say of it. We know not what will become of 
 us, when we are young. We always do well, what 
 we do with pleasure. One is not always in the 
 humour to hear music. You are happier when you 
 are young. In the golden age, they ate strawberries, 
 blackberries, and acorns, as Ovid says. People often 
 say what they do not mean. We often do things 
 we are afterwards sorry for. We often do what we 
 ought not to do. We do not always do what we 
 ought to do. They say you are going to be married. 
 People think I am rich, because I do not let [them] 
 see my poverty. You are not old at fifty. We 
 must not always do what people tell us. People 
 will tell you, perhaps, that you are pretty ; distrust 
 such language, it is flattery. You ought not to 
 
 discours 
 harm any one. You ought always to think before 
 
 reflechir 
 you speak. They say that the King of Spain is 
 dead. God sends misfortunes, we ought not to 
 complain. 
 
 Rule 10. — The passive voice is seldom used in 
 French ; when it occurs in English, if the expression 
 be indefinite, turn the verb into the active voice, and 
 use the word on before it, as : 
 
 We have been told so On nous Va dit. 
 
 Rule 11. — If the expression be not indefinite, you 
 may often make the agent of the passive verb, the 
 nominative of the active verb, as : 
 
 He has been beaten by his father Son pere Va battu. 
 
102 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 12. — When the nominative case of the pas- 
 sive verb, in English, is an inanimate object, the 
 verb is frequently turned, in French, into a re- 
 fleeted verb, as : 
 
 Cheese is sold at a very low price. Le fromage se vend 
 a tres-bas prix. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 An old habit is left 12 off with difficulty. We 
 have been robbed. 10 Happiness is not [to be] pur- 
 chased. 12 Everything is sold 12 in England. I have 
 been 10 promised a new frock. He has 10 been ill- 
 used. Your father has been 11 banished. You 10 have 
 been told so twice. He is 10 suspected. It was by 
 Romulus 11 that Rome was built. It has 10 been done 
 several times. His treasure has 10 been stolen from 
 him. We 10 have been deceived. I am going 10 to 
 have a harp bought for me. He has been 11 aban- 
 doned by his friends. Wine is 12 sold cheap in Cham- 
 pagne. The cloth has 10 been laid this hour. You 
 are 10 expected. He is said to 10 have succeeded. Tea 
 used 12 to be bought formerly at the apothecary's. 
 He is 10 accused of high treason. How dear butter 
 is sold. 12 My watch 10 has been stolen from me. He 
 has been disinherited 11 by his uncle. Children are 
 often neglected 11 by their parents. How is that 10 
 done ? How 10 is butter made ? You have 10 been 
 imposed upon. A good boy is loved 11 by every body. 
 We like to be flattered. 10 If you are asked 11 by 
 any one where I am gone, say that I am gone into 
 the city. If you should 11 be scolded by your parents, 
 say it was my fault. That lace is sold 12 very dear. 
 French is spoken 10 here. Nothing is given 12 away 
 in that house. He was taken 11 prisoner by the 
 
EXERCISES. 103 
 
 French. I was treated with great 11 kindness by the 
 duke, and was sent 11 away loaded with presents. 
 Beer is sold 12 at three pence a quart. I was whipped 10 
 every week. Children were whipped 10 at Lacedsemon, 
 to prevent them from growing fat. * 
 
 Rule 13. — The word that, which is frequently un- 
 derstood in English conversation, must always be 
 expressed in French, as : 
 
 The man you see L'homme que vous voye%. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 
 I hope you are well. You see I am right. The 
 books I sold you were very cheap. Can you repay 
 me the money I lent you ? Did you read the letter 
 I sent you ? The gentleman you have just seen is 
 my cousin. What have you done with the money I 
 gave you ? Who says I am idle ? You know you 
 are wrong. I am afraid I shall not succeed. The 
 gentleman you recommended to me is dead. Have 
 you seen the knife I bought ? I am afraid you will 
 not succeed. I hear you are going to be married. 
 Where are the books I lent you ? Are you sure he 
 saw me ? The watch I bought is good for nothing. 
 I think there will be company at our house to-morrow 
 evening. I am sure he is there. How much do you 
 think I paid for the gloves I purchased yesterday ? 
 Where is the wit you boasted so much of ? I have 
 spent all the money I had received. Where are the 
 presents I gave you ? 
 
 Rule 14. — When the French verb requires no pre- 
 position after it, the pronoun it, governed by the verb 
 in the objective case, is expressed by le or la, accord- 
 ing to the gender of the noun to which it relates, by 
 
104 EXERCISES. 
 
 en when the verb requires de, and by y when the verb 
 requires a after it, as : 
 
 I see it Je le vols, 
 
 I see it Je la vois. 
 
 I want it Ten ai besom. 
 
 I will think of it J'y penseraL 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI, 
 
 We shall pass over London-bridge, because I have 
 not yet seen it. Come and say your lesson. I do 
 not know it yet, sir. I will talk to you about it by- 
 and-bye. I knew not what answer to make to it. 
 Do you see this orange ? — I am going to give it to 
 your sister. — No, do not give it to her, give it to me. 
 Do not talk about it. He is a judge of it. He will 
 accustom himself to it. Will you have this apple ? 
 I shall not be able to eat it all ; take half of it. I 
 will reflect upon it. He will repent it. He com- 
 plains very much of it. If you will buy my ring, I 
 will sell it you for a guinea. I gave two guineas for 
 it. I will not wear it any more. 
 
 Rule 15. — When the conjunction and, joining two 
 verbs together, can to be turned into to, it must not 
 be expressed in French, and the next verb must be 
 put in the infinitive mood, as : 
 
 Go and play Alter jouer. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 Come and see me to-morrow. We will go and tell 
 him his brother is arrived. Stay and sup with us. 
 Run and stop him. Go and fetch me my spectacles. 
 
EXERCISES. 105 
 
 Try and learn your lesson. Run and fetch the doc- 
 tor. Come and say your lesson. I hope you will 
 come and see me soon. Go and* show the gentle- 
 man a light. Will you come and play with me ? I 
 went and spent a week at my uncle's. I think I 
 shall go and dine at my aunt's. Go and wash your 
 face. Go into the stables and fetch my horse. Go 
 and sit in your place. I hope you will stay and dine 
 with us. Come and take your soup, it will be cold. 
 
 se refroidir 
 Will you come and take a walk with me ? Go and 
 do it directly. Go and beg his pardon. 
 
 Rule 16. — The verbs avoir peur, craindre, appre- 
 hender, prendre garde, and empecherrf used affirma- 
 tively, govern the following verb in the subjunctive 
 mood, and require the particle ne before it, as : 
 
 I am afraid he will know it Je crains quil ne le sache. 
 
 I am afraid he will do it J'ai peur quilxie lefasse. 
 
 I will prevent him from going J'empecheraiquilnyaille. 
 It is feared the enemy will hear of it On apprehende que Vennemi 
 
 ne le sache. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 He was afraid I should know it. He was afraid 
 they would put him to death. He is afraid he shall 
 be turned away. That accident will prevent your 
 mamma from coming to see us. I am afraid it will 
 
 * Eclairer, to show a light, requires a after it. Eclair er 
 has three significations : to show a light, as : 
 
 Eclair ez a monsieur, Show the gentleman a light. 
 
 To enlighten, as : Le soleil eclaire la terre, The sun en- 
 lightens the earth ; and it lightens, il eclaire. 
 
 f Empecher is more often followed by an infinitive, as : I 
 will prevent him from going, Je Vempecherai d'y alter, 
 F 5 
 
106 EXERCISES. 
 
 rain. He is apprehensive that they will suspect him 
 of having done it. He is afraid they will put him 
 into prison. I will do all in my power to prevent 
 my father from being the dupe of that man. I am 
 afraid it will be told to my father. Why are you 
 afraid he should know it ? I am afraid I shall be 
 suspected of having had a hand in it. I am afraid I 
 shall be scolded. I will prevent it from being known. 
 Why are you afraid he will come ? Because I am 
 afraid he will beat me. 
 
 Rule 17. — Verbs of doubting, wishing, fearing, 
 ordering, &c, require the subjunctive mood. Ob- 
 serve that the present of the subjunctive is used 
 when the former verb is in the present or future ; 
 and the imperfect when the former verb is in the 
 imperfect or conditional. 
 
 Rule 18. — Impersonal verbs and verbs used im- 
 personally are followed by the subjunctive. Except, 
 il y a, il par ait, il est sur, il est certain, il resulte, 
 and a few others implying certainty ; and il semble 
 accompanied by a pronoun. 
 
 Rule 19. — Interrogative and negative verbs also 
 govern the subjunctive ; except where a question, 
 instead of marking a doubt, is used as a stronger 
 affirmative. 
 
 Rule 20. — Quelque-que, quel que, quoique, quoi 
 que, and the conjunctions afin que, a moins que, 
 avant que, bien que, de crainte que, pour que, &c, 
 also govern the subjunctive. 
 
 Why doubt that the soul is 17 immortal ? I wish 
 you would do 17 me that kindness. I am afraid I 
 shall be punished. 17 It is astonishing that you did 
 
EXERCISES. 107 
 
 not stay 18 there. It seems that you have been de- 
 ceived. 18 It is certain that he will be punished. 18 
 Do you think it will rain ? 19 I do not expect the 
 
 esperer 
 affair will succeed. 19 Philosophers as learned as 
 they are, 20 are sometimes mistaken. Although the 
 wicked sometimes prosper, 20 do not think that they 
 are 19 happy. Who is the man that has 19 not too 
 high an opinion of himself, and too poor an one of 
 
 idee mince 
 
 others. Do you think the guilty man sleeps 19 
 quiet, and that he can 19 stifle the remorse with 
 which he is disturbed ? It seems that time is a 
 
 dechire 
 common enemy, against which all men have conspired. 
 
 etre conjure 
 Methinks that nothing is 18 more capable of elevating 
 il me semble propre a 
 
 the soul, than the contemplation of the wonders of 
 nature. Although the comforts of life are 20 often the 
 fruits of art, they are not always the portion of 
 artists. Is there a man who has 19 never had to 
 complain of his fellow-creatures ? Is there a man 
 who can 19 flatter himself with enjoying constant feli- 
 city ? Il seems (as if) nature took 18 a pleasure, in 
 
 que 
 the reign of Louis the Fourteenth, in producing 
 great men of every description. What are the evils 
 
 genre 
 that have 19 not at the same time their remedies ? Men 
 talk of happiness, but is there one who knows 19 in 
 what it consists? The envious man would wish 
 that whatever is good might 17 belong to himself. 
 God has granted sleep to the wicked, that the good 
 might have 20 a few moments of tranquillity. Solon, 
 at his death, ordered that his bones should be car- 
 
108 EXERCISES. 
 
 ried 17 to Salamis, that they should be burned, and 
 that their ashes should be thrown about the coun- 
 try. It is so natural to esteem what we like, that 
 we would wish it to be esteemed 17 in the same manner 
 everywhere. 
 
 Rule 21. — A relative pronoun, or the adverb on, 
 placed after a superlative relative, or after seul, peu, 
 rien, or pas un, requires the subjunctive, as : 
 
 It is the only place you can aspire to. Cest la seule place 
 ou vous puissiez aspirer. 
 
 He is the only man I know in London. Cest le seul mon- 
 sieur que^'e connaisse a Londres. 
 
 There are few men who can support adversity. II y a peu 
 a" homines qui puissent supporter Vadversite. 
 
 It is the finest country I have ever seen. Cest le plus beau 
 pays que faie jamais vu. 
 
 There is not one of my friends that will assist me. // ny a 
 pas un de mes amis qui veuille me secourir. 
 
 I know nothing that can amuse you. Je ne sais rien qui 
 puisse vous amuser. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. 
 
 The most useful lessons we can receive are those 
 of experience. Wisdom is the only thing whose pos- 
 session is certain. The example of a good life is the 
 best lesson that can be given 10 to the human race. 
 The Chinese religion is the only [one] of all the 
 religions that has not taught the immortality of the 
 soul. The siege of Azoth lasted twenty-nine years, 
 it is the longest that is mentioned in ancient history. 
 
 etre question 
 The motions of the planets are the most regular 
 [ones] that we 9 are acquainted with. La Fontaine 
 was perhaps the only [one] of the literati of his time 
 
EXERCISES. 109 
 
 who had no share in the liberality of Louis the Four- 
 teenth. There were few men who could embrace 
 the thumb of the Colossus at Rhodes, which was a 
 statue of the sun high enough for ships to pass 20 
 under. 
 
 Rule 22.- — The expression " It is in vain for me 
 to," or " It is of no use for me to/' is rendered in 
 French, by fai beau, as : 
 
 It is in vain for me to speak. J'ai beau parler. 
 
 It is of no use for thee to talk. Tu as beau dire. 
 
 It is of no use his talking. // a beau dire. 
 
 It is in vain for us to speak. Nous avons beau parler. 
 
 It is of no use for you to talk. Vous avez beau dire. 
 
 It is in vain for ihem to talk. lis ont beau parler. 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 
 It is in vain for them to wish for it, they shall not 
 have it. It is in vain for people to talk, we cannot 
 live upon the air. It is of no use for you to tell me 
 all your troubles, I have nothing to give you. It was 
 in vain for me to shut my 122 eyes, I could not sleep. 
 It was of no use for him to cry out, no one 155 heard 
 him. It will be in vain for me to tell him so, he 
 will not believe me. It is of no use my giving you 
 lessons ; if you do not reduce them to practice, you 
 will never learn to speak French. It was of no use 
 his writing, his letters were never answered. 11 It 
 was in vain for me to wish to persuade him, he would 
 not do it. It is of no use saying anything to him, 
 he does not mind. 
 
 Rule 23. — That as a relative, is expressed in French 
 by qui, when it is the nominative to the next verb ; 
 
110 EXERCISES. 
 
 by que, when the objective case ; and by dont, when 
 the verb requires de after it. That, as a conjunction, 
 is invariably expressed by que, as : 
 
 'The gentleman that is speaking. Le monsieur qui parle. 
 The apple you are eating. La pomme que vous mangex. 
 
 The money I want. L 1 argent dont fax besoin. 
 
 You think I am mistaken. Vouscroye% quejeme trompe. 
 
 EXERCISE XLI. 
 
 I have lost the bird that you gave me. Do you 
 see the gentleman that is walking yonder ? he* is my 
 uncle. Thatf is the man who did it. Have you 
 obtained the money that you wanted ? He says that 
 you have hurt him. Do nothing that you may 21 
 repent of afterwards. The lady that you are speak- 
 ing of, has been dead these two months. Where 
 are the books that you promised me ? I have found 
 the finest ring that you ever saw. 21 I plainly per- 
 ceive that you will not succeed. Did you eat the 
 pear that I gave 41 you ? 
 
 Rule 24. — The latter of two verbs is put in the 
 infinitive. To have, or to get, followed by a past 
 participle, is expressed in Erench by the verb /aire ; 
 and this will apply to any expression signifying to 
 cause, J as : 
 
 He has had a house huilt. 11 a fait batir une maison. 
 You will get scolded. Vous vous ferez gronder. 
 
 He had him put to death. II le fit mourir. 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
 f This is, that is, these are, those are, are expressed, in 
 French, by void, voild. There is, there are, used demonstra^ 
 tively, are expressed in the same manner. 
 
 % To let fall, for instance, meaning to cause to fall, is ex- 
 pressed by faire tomber. To ask up stairs, i; e, to cause to go 
 up stairs, faire monter. 
 
EXERCISES. Ill 
 
 EXERCISE XLII. 
 
 Do you want* to get your throat cut ? He has 
 had his house rebuilt. He has had gold buttons put 
 on his coat. Do not get scolded on my account. I 
 am going to have my 122 hair curled. Where do you 
 get your shoes made ? You must have those mat- 
 tresses beat again. You have let something fall.f 
 Ask [the] gentleman up stairs. Have some beef 
 steaks broiled for my dinner. He has gone to get a 
 tooth drawn. If you pursue so irregular a conduct, 
 you will cause yourself to be disinherited. I am 
 going to have my 122 ears pierced. Will you have 
 the kindness to get my linen ironed ? If you go on 
 that (way), you will get hanged. He will get 
 
 train 
 whipped, if he does not take care. 
 
 Rule 25. — Quand, lorsque, and aussitot que, re- 
 quire the following verb to be put in the future 
 tense, whenever a future is implied, as : 
 
 As soon as you have done, come to me. Aussitot que 
 
 vous aurez Jini, venez me trouver. 
 I will pay you when you like. Je vous paierai quand 
 
 vous voudrez. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII. 
 
 When you have done writing, go to bed. When 
 he has ruined you, you will begin to open your 122 
 eyes. As soon as it is dark, I will go out with you. 
 You ought to get up as soon as it is light. [On] 
 
 * See note, page 30. t See note second, page 110. 
 
112 EXERCISES. 
 
 Saturday, as soon as I have written my letters, I 
 shall go out of town, and shall not return until 
 
 a la campagne, d'ou 
 Tuesday. When he has (wasted) all his property, 
 
 manger 
 he will begin to hear reason. I will set out as soon 
 as it has ceased raining. When I have money, I 
 will lend you some. As soon as he sees me, he will 
 come and 15 speak to me. When you have dined, 
 come to me, I want* to speak to you. As soon as 
 we have had tea, we are going to the theatre. He 
 may set out when he likes. 
 
 Rule 26. — The word than, before an indicative 
 mood, is expressed, in French, by que ne ; before an 
 infinitive, by que de, or by qu'a, according as the 
 preceding verb requires de or a after it, as : 
 
 I drink more than I eat. Je bois plus queje ne mange. 
 I had rather sell it than give it. J'aimerais mieux le 
 
 vendre que de le donner. 
 He is thinking rather how he may injure you than how 
 
 he may serve you. Ilpense plus a vous nuire qu'a vous 
 
 rendre service. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIV. 
 
 I am richer than you think. You are more 
 foolish than you imagine. I had rather die than do 
 it. We are often less unhappy than we think. He 
 says more than he thinks. It is better to give it 
 away than to throw it away. We are more busy 
 
 s'occupef 
 in amusing ourselves than in (gaining instruction). 
 
 s'instruire 
 
 * See note, page 30. 
 
EXERCISES. 113 
 
 He knows more about it than he wished (to tell) 
 
 apprendre 
 you. I remember it very well : he said you would 
 do better to put your own affairs in order, than to 
 meddle with his. It is better to be silent for ever 
 than to tell a falsehood. He is thinking more of 
 eating, than working. He is cleverer than he is 
 thought. 
 
 Rule 27. — The expression to be far from is ex- 
 pressed by s'en faillir que, and the following verb 
 must be put in the subjunctive mood, as : 
 
 You are far from guessing the reason. II s'en faut que 
 
 vous en deviniez la cause. 
 I was far from being satisfied with it. Ils'enfallait que 
 
 jenfusse content. 
 Far from it. 11 s'en faut. 
 So far from it. Tant s'en faut. 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 
 I am far from believing what you tell me. Thou 
 art far from being as clever as thy brother. He is 
 far from guessing what I am going to do. We are 
 very far from selling dear. You were far from 
 guessing the true motives of my conduct. They are 
 far from being as learned as the English. So far 
 from succeeding, he has not the least chance. You 
 
 esperance 
 are far from knowing your lesson. You are far from 
 being as unhappy as I am. He was far from being 
 satisfied with you. I was far from having any plea- 
 sure there. I am far from being as rich as your 
 uncle. Your brother is far from being as learned as 
 vou. 
 
114 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 28. — To be the fault of if- — not, or to have if 
 one likes, is expressed, in French, by ne tenir qu'a, 
 as : 
 
 It is my fault if I do not II ne tlent qua moi de. 
 It is thy fault if thou dost not 11 ne thnt qua toi de. 
 
 He may if he likes II ne tient qua lui de. 
 
 We may if we like II ne tient qua nous de. 
 
 It is your fault if you do not II ne tient qua vous de. 
 
 They may if they like // ne tient qua eux de. (m.) 
 
 They may if they like II ne tient qua elles de. (f.) 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI. 
 
 I may go if I like. It is my fault if I do not suc- 
 ceed. He may have his father's horse if he likes. 
 It is his own fault if he does not succeed. It is his 
 own fault if he is not elected. We may be happy 
 if we like. It is our own fault if we are not rich. 
 You might have been a clergyman if you had liked. 
 It is your own fault if you are not a bishop. They 
 may be victorious if they choose. It is their own 
 fault if they do not gain the battle. You act* very 
 ill towards your sister ; it is your fault if she is not 
 married. It was our fault if we did not make our 
 fortunes. My brother may be elected member of 
 parliament if he chooses. 
 
 Rule 29. — Nearly, may be expressed, in French, by 
 peu s'enfaut que, and the following verb must be put 
 in the subjunctive, with ne before it, as : 
 
 I nearly fell. Peu sen est fallu que je ne sois tombe. 
 He nearly named him. Peu sen est fallu qu'il ne Fait 
 
 nomme. 
 I nearly broke my leg. Peu s'en est fallu que je ne me 
 
 sois casselajambe. 
 
 * Never use en with agir, for agir never takes de after it. 
 See Rule 14. 
 
EXERCISES. 115 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII. 
 
 That dog nearly bit me. I nearly cut my finger. 
 He nearly told me all he knew about the matter. I 
 nearly fell into the ditch. I nearly ruined him. We 
 nearly caught him. He was nearly drowned. We 
 were nearly shipwrecked. We were nearly falling 
 with fatigue. I nearly ran over him. I was nearly 
 telling him that he was anything but an honest man. 
 She was near falling into the same mistake. We 
 were near firing on them. They were near catching 
 us. He was near falling into the fire. I was near 
 treading on his (toes) . I was near running him 
 
 pieds 
 through. I was near sending him away. I was 
 near falling into the snare. 
 
 Rule 30. — If — but a little, is expressed, in French, 
 by pour peu que, and the following verb must be put 
 in the subjunctive mood, as : 
 
 If you had hut had a little foresight, that would not have 
 happened to you. Pour peu que vous eussiez eu de 
 prevogance, cela ne vous serait pas arrive. 
 
 If you but -pay a little attention to these rules, you will 
 soon improve. Pour peu que vous fassiez attention a 
 ces regies, vous ferez bientot des progres. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 
 If you but had a little prudence, you would not 
 keep such company. If you but had a little gene- 
 rosity, you would reward the honesty of that poor 
 man. If you will but have a little patience, you will 
 be told everything. If we but like study a little, we 
 
116 EXERCISES. 
 
 soon remove every difficulty. If one be but ever so 
 little angry with him, he begins immediately to cry 
 like a child. If we but reflect a little, we must be 
 convinced that a Frenchman cannot teach French 
 as well as an Englishman. If you but be a little 
 economical, you will soon make your fortune. If 
 you had but had a little politeness, you would not 
 have suffered the lady to go home by herself. 
 
 Rule 31. — When the verb to be is followed by a 
 past participle, the expression is passive; when by a 
 present participle, it is not passive, as ; 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 We shall be scolded On nous grondera. 
 
 I have been robbed On ma vole. 
 
 He has been flogged On Vafouette. 
 
 It has been told me On me Va dit. 
 
 NOT PASSIVE. 
 He is always scolding II gronde toujours. 
 
 He is robbing his father II vole son per e. 
 
 He is flogging his son llfouette sonfils. 
 
 He is telling a falsehood II dit un mensonge. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIX. 
 
 I am writing a letter. That letter is not well 
 written. He was taking his coffee. The town was 
 taken by assault. We were playing at piquet. He 
 was reading, when I entered. 38 Homer will always 
 be read with new delight. He was running as fast 
 
 a toutes 
 as he could. He was shaving himself, when I ar- 
 
 jambes 
 rived. I am shaved. I have been walking all day. 
 He is always finding fault with what I do. He was 
 
EXERCISES. 117 
 
 reading Virgil, when I perceived him. His father 
 was murdered. What were yon doing all yesterday, 
 that you did not go out ? What was he saying to 
 you ? It is said that the King of Spain is dead. 
 
 Rule 32. — When que, dont, a quoi, avec lequel, 
 dans lequel, or its equivalent oit, precedes a verb, 
 having a noun for its nominative and no indirect regi- 
 men, (except it be a personal pronoun,) that noun 
 may be elegantly placed after its verb, as : 
 
 Here is a story which one of your friends told me. 
 
 Void une histoire que ma coulee un de vos amis. 
 They blaspheme the name which their fathers invoked. 
 
 lis blasphement le nom quont invoque leurs peres. 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 
 It has been said, with reason, that shame is a 
 mixture of the grief and fear which infamy causes. 
 
 chagrins 
 Their premature death has spread a deep mourning 
 all over the country, which their presence rejoiced, 
 and their virtues embellished. It was under the 
 shade of the evergreen foliage of that laurel, that my 
 dear parents used formerly to repose them- 
 
 auteurs de mes jours 
 selves. We were admiring the splendid sight which 
 
 riche 
 the horizon presented. One is not less struck with 
 the grandeur and promptitude with which peace is 
 made, than with the rapidity with which conquests 
 are made. The finest days that spring gives you, 
 are not worth those which winter leaves us here ; and 
 never does the month of May appear to you so plea- 
 sant as the month of January is to us. I depart, 
 and am going to join that faithful flock, which the 
 
118 EXERCISES. 
 
 solemn pomp of this day attracts. What delights 
 can be compared to those which a good action 
 causes ? Whatever be his inclinations, the wise man 
 surmounts them; it is on ourselves that glory or 
 shame depends. It is to Jenner that the discovery 
 of vaccination is due. I should do wrong to pass 
 over in silence the pain and anxiety which this 
 Sicilian lord experienced during my illness. I see 
 
 avoir 
 the infallible means which the minister has, of suc- 
 ceeding in his enterprise. That, continued he, is 
 what my friend told me. It is like the perfume 
 which a (tender) rose (diffuses), at the first rays 
 
 jeune exhaler 
 
 of the sun. Lovely children ! how amiable is 
 your fate ! Alas ! all the efforts of art cannot 
 procure us half the pleasure that nature la- 
 obtenir a nos cccurs 
 
 vishes on you. We perceived an osier cradle, in 
 which a child, as beautiful as an angel, was reposing. 
 That is what misers seldom think of. 
 
 Rule 33. — The definite article the, the possessive 
 pronouns my, his, &c, or a substantive in the posses- 
 sive case, frequently precedes the English participle 
 in ing. When this occurs at the beginning of a 
 sentence, if you cannot turn the participle into a 
 substantive, you must give the sentence a different 
 turn, as : 
 
 The pardoning of our enemies does not consist merely in 
 not injuring them. Le pardon des ennemis ne consiste 
 pas settlement a ne leur pas nuire. 
 
 My scolding of you is of no use. 11 ne me sert de rien de 
 vous gronder. 
 
 When this happens in the middle of a sentence, use 
 que, or de ce que, a ce que, if the verb requires a pre- 
 
EXERCISES. 119 
 
 position, making the primitive of the possessive pro- 
 noun, or the substantive, the nominative case to the 
 following verb, which must be put in the present or 
 past of the indicative, according as the participle ex- 
 presses a present or a past, as : 
 
 That proceeds from your not eating. Cela vient de ce 
 que vous ne mangez pas. 
 
 EXERCISE LI. 
 
 His going away surprised us all. Your father's 
 being angry with you is, I know, the cause of your 
 sadness. That proceeds from your not holding 
 yourself upright. What exclamations do you not 
 make at a man's having the boldness to write upon 
 such a subject ! Why rejoice at my not having suc- 
 ceeded ? I am thinking of that poet's having 
 finished so long a poem in so short a time. That 
 comes from your not believing what I told you. He 
 complains of my having taken part against him ; but 
 he is silent about (sur) his having lent money to 
 enable my enemies to ruin me. He is in despair at 
 his books having been taken from him. They have 
 made a mistake in their having fixed the date of that 
 event ninety years before our Saviour, since it is 
 known that it could not have taken place until a long 
 time afterwards, mention being made in it of His 
 sufferings. I am not surprised at your wanting to 
 borrow money, and I am less surprised at your 
 friends' refusing to lend you any. What is the 
 cause of his having refused to assist you? The 
 reading of novels is a seducing poison. Do not be 
 alarmed at my being ill, I am but too often so. 
 lam rejoiced at your father's having so well suc- 
 ceeded in his enterprise. The teaching of youth 
 
120 EXERCISES. 
 
 should be intrusted to those only who possess an in- 
 exhaustible fund of patience. His keeping of so 
 many dogs must be attended with a great expense. 
 He is angry at your not having mentioned your 
 voyage to him. We were soon undeceived by our 
 enemies' turning their backs. He is astonished at 
 your father's having received him so coolly. The 
 burning of criminals is quite abolished. What sur- 
 prised him most, was the man's swallowing molten 
 lead. Your father's entering the room unexpectedly 
 disconcerted us all. The training of horses for 
 racing is attended with cruelties, which would make 
 you shudder. 
 
 Rule 34. — When the verb to make, or any other 
 expression signifying to cause, is followed by a 
 noun in the objective case and another verb, that 
 noun becomes, in French, the nominative to the fol- 
 lowing verb, and must be preceded by que, as: 
 
 What makes that tree not grow like others ? Quest-ce 
 qui fait que cet arbre ne pouisse pas comme les autres. 
 
 That made the fire spread so far. Cest-ce qui a fait que 
 V incendie s est repandu si loin, 
 
 N.B. — This rule may also be applied when the ob- 
 jective case is a personal pronoun, especially when 
 the following verb is reflected, as : 
 
 What makes you storm so? Qu'est-ce qui fait que vous 
 vous emportez tant ? 
 
 What 5 makes you not like study ? He is a man 
 who takes a serious interest in your affairs : that is, 
 no doubt, what makes him storm so against your 
 enemies. What makes you always stare at me so ? 
 What makes you speak so loud ? You are always 
 talking, that is what makes you have so many tasks. 
 
EXERCISES. 121 
 
 What 142 is the reason we never see your father now ? 
 What makes men think so little of death ? What 
 makes us always find fault with others, and scarcely 
 ever with ourselves ? What 136 makes me fond of 
 study, is, that my master knew how to render it 
 pleasing to me. What makes women not like each 
 other ? That is what makes you not succeed. 
 
 Rule 35. — When a noun in the objective case 
 comes between an active verb and the participle of a 
 neuter verb, to both of which it relates, although 
 it precedes the latter verb in English, it must, 
 in French, be placed after it, as : 
 
 I see your father coming. Je vols venir voire pere. 
 Did you ever hear such nonsense said ? A-t-on jamais 
 entendu dire des sottises pareilles ? 
 
 Rule 36. — The same order as in English should, 
 however, be preserved, when you wish particularly to 
 draw attention to the action of the participle, by 
 putting the second verb in the indicative with qui be- 
 fore it, as : 
 
 I see your father coming. Je vois monsieur voire pere 
 
 qui vient. 
 I hear your father speaking. Tentends voire pere qui 
 
 parle. 
 
 EXERCISE LII. 
 
 I have heard your uncle say he never went to col- 
 lege. I attack on her throne a haughty queen, who 
 beholds a numerous camp of bold foreigners and 
 faithless Hebrews marching under her banners. I 
 saw your late father die. They heard the boy cry- 
 ing, but left him to perish, I smell something burn- 
 ing. 36 Did you hear that man speak ? 1 will go to 
 
122 EXERCISES. 
 
 the ball this evening, were it only to see your brother 
 dance. I saw our neighbour's house burnt down. 
 Did you ever see such things done ? I think I hear 
 your father scolding. 36 I amuse myself at seeing 
 the others dancing. Did you ever see a child run 
 so ? 
 
 Rule 37. — When a sentence begins with an inter- 
 rogative adverb, the substantive, adjective or adverb 
 which immediately follows it in English, is generally 
 placed after the verb, in French, as : 
 
 What force and eloquence sentiment and truth give. 
 Que le sentiment et la verite donnent de force et d'elo- 
 quence. 
 
 What power virtue has over the most ferocious minds. 
 Que la vertu a de pouvoir sur les ames les plus feroces. 
 
 EXERCISE LIII. 
 
 How many 46 children have I not known, who pre- 
 ferred study to their games ! How credulous our 
 passions make us, and how difficultly does a heart 
 that is deeply affected detach itself from the very 
 errors it perceives ! How unhappy I am ! How 
 tiresome that is ! How disinterested flatterers are ! 
 they wish those with whom ambition detains them 
 all that is good, except good sense and prudence. 
 What 76 charms beauty has, when it is united with 
 wisdom ! How unfortunate you are ! How sad you 
 seem ! What wit that man possesses ! How [very] 
 dirty your hands are ! How much kindness he has 
 had for me ! How short life is ! What news is 
 there ? How avaricious we ought to be of our time ! 
 How angry we ought to be with ourselves when we 
 
EXERCISES. 123 
 
 have done wrong ! How cold one must be in your 
 
 devoir 
 country ! How hot it must be where you are sit- 
 ting ! 
 
 The difficulty, so often complained of, in the 
 proper uses of the tenses of the French verb, arises 
 from our expressing, by the imperfect, the times dis- 
 tinguished, in French, by the imperfect, the preterit 
 indefinite, and the preterit definite. 
 
 Our imperfect tense should be translated by 
 
 Rule 38. — The preterit indefinite, when the action 
 or event has taken place within the period of time 
 implied by the speaker, as : 
 
 I rose very early this morning. Je me suis leve de bonne 
 heure ce matin. 
 
 (The period of time in which I am speaking is to- 
 day, and the action has taken place within that 
 period.) 
 
 Rule 39. — The preterit definite, when the action 
 took place but once, and at a specified time anterior 
 to the period of time implied, as : 
 
 I rose last Saturday at four o'clock. Je me levai samedi 
 passe a quatre heures. 
 
 (The action took place but once, and at a specified 
 time, anterior to the one in which I am speaking.) 
 
 Rule 40. — The imperfect in every other instance, 
 especially when continuation or habitual perform- 
 ance is signified, as : 
 
 When I was in Paris, I rose very late. Quand jetais a 
 Paris, je me levais bien tard. 
 
 g2 
 
124 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE LIV. 
 
 I was very ill this morning. I was very ill that 
 night. I was always ill when I was in London. I 
 awoke at six this morning. It was on the sixth of 
 October, I remember it well, I awoke in a fright, 
 
 en sursaut 
 (hurried on) my clothes, and [on] going (down 
 mettre a la hate en 
 
 stairs), found the parlour in flames. When I was 
 
 has 
 young I always awoke at an early hour. I began 
 my exercise a few minutes ago. I began my 
 apprenticeship [on] the eighteenth of October, 
 [one] thousand eight hundred [and] sixteen. When 
 I was eighteen, I already began to put money by. 
 
 de cdte 
 I bade him hold his tongue this morning or 
 he would have abused you. My aunt bade me 
 
 dire des sottises 
 always (return home) at ten o'clock. I do not 
 
 rentrer 
 like that dog, it bit me once. Do you remember 
 St. Catharine's [day,] last year, as I was passing 40 
 la Ste. Catherine 
 
 (by your door), your dog (flew at) me, and 
 devant chez vous sejeter sur 
 
 (bit) me in my arm ? Well, I have not 
 
 /aire une morsure a 
 yet recovered (from the wound) ; I was rubbing my 
 
 en 
 eyes when he bit 38 me. The surgeon bled me in my 
 arm this morning ; he bled me twice last week ; my 
 last surgeon never used to bleed me. In (getting out) 
 
 sortir 
 
EXERCISES. 125 
 
 of bed this morning, I knocked my watch down, and 
 broke it. Last Sunday, as we were going to church, 
 my brother fell, (and put his wrist out of joint). 
 
 se demettre le poing 
 When I was at school, I frequently broke panes of 
 
 carreau de 
 glass, which I was obliged to pay (out of) my 
 vitre de 
 
 (weekly allowance). My tailor brought me a coat 
 
 semaine pi. 
 the other day, that fitted me like a sack; he brought 
 
 aller 
 it me again this morning ; but I would not keep it. 
 Your brother came to see me last week, and brought 
 
 amener 
 his friend with him. She brought me every day a 
 basket of flowers, when I lived in that part of the 
 
 quartier 
 town. It is not long since I bought this hat, and it 
 is already quite (worn out). On my arrival in 
 
 use 
 London, it was [on] the tenth of October, my friend 
 and I went to make some purchases. I went into 
 
 emplettes entrer 
 
 a jeweller's [shop] and bought a ring, to make a pre- 
 sent to your sister ; (you were not at home, but your 
 mother well remembers it ;) I was going to present 
 the ring to your sister, but it was of no use my 
 feeling [for it] ; ring, purse, money, watch, all had 
 fouiller 
 disappeared: since that time I am always cautious 
 
 sur mes gardes 
 when I have occasion to walk through the streets of 
 
 dans 
 London ; I had very little experience at that time. I 
 often bought what I had no need of at all, to please 
 
126 EXERCISES. 
 
 my friends. I caught him once passing bad 
 
 a donner faux 
 money to me. I caught him again yesterday, 
 going to play me the same trick. I often caught it 
 qui allait 
 
 when I was at school. He came to my bed-side 
 to-day, and said (some very flattering things) to me, 
 
 des douceurs 
 but I was on my guard, and would not (pat my hand to) 
 
 signer 
 any paper. He came to see me yesterday, to try if 
 he could pump me. He came every day to ask me 
 for money, until at last I was obliged to tell him that I 
 would order my servant to shut the door (in his face) 
 
 au nez 
 the next time he came. 
 
 Rule 41. — The past participle agrees with its 
 direct* regimen, if that regimen precede it ; when it 
 does not precede it, in all verbs conjugated with 
 avoir, the participle remains invariable. 
 
 This rule applies to all active verbs, whether 
 reflective, reciprocal, pronominal, or not. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE REGIMEN DIRECT. 
 
 The watch that I bought. La montre que fat achetee. 
 Your sister was angry. Votre soeur s'est fdchee. 
 
 The lady whom you saw* La dame que vous avez vue. 
 
 (In the above examples, the participle agrees with 
 the que or se that precedes, because those words are 
 directly governed by it.) 
 
 * The direct regimen is that word which is governed by the 
 verb, without the aid of a preposition. 
 
EXERCISES, 127 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE REGIMEN INDIRECT. 
 
 Tr . , , , .„ j , t n ( Votre sceur s'est donne 
 Your sister has killed herself. < * . 
 
 That lady has been pleased to 1 Madame sest plu a me 
 contradict me. / contredire. 
 
 They have spoken to one S mle$ sg gm ^ 
 another. ) r 
 
 (In the first two examples, se stands for a elle- 
 meme, and in the last for a elles-memes ; conse- 
 quently the participle does not agree.) 
 
 Rule 42. — The past participle agrees with the 
 nominative case of the verb, in all passive verbs, and 
 in neuter verbs conjugated with etre, as : 
 
 Your sister has been punished. Votre sosur a ete piinie. 
 
 v . r ,, n i i ( Votre cousine est tombee 
 
 i our cousin fell from her horse. < , 7 7 
 
 ( de cheval. 
 
 N.B. Neuter verbs can have no direct regimen, 
 therefore the participle of a neuter verb, conjugated 
 with avoir y remains invariable, as : 
 
 The leagues I have walked. Les Ueues quefai fait. 
 
 The hours I have been running. Les heures quejai couru* 
 
 DIFFICULTIES OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rule 43. — Sometimes the participle is followed by 
 another active verb, which governs the preceding 
 noun; care must be taken, then, not to make the 
 participle agree with it, as : 
 
 The watch which I saw you purchase. La montre queje 
 
 vous ai vu acheter. 
 The ring I thought to have found. La bague que j' avals 
 
 cru trouver. 
 
128 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 (Here vu and cru do not agree with montre and 
 bague, because those nouns are not governed by 
 them, but by the verbs acheter and trouver.) 
 
 Rule 4A. — Sometimes the participle of a reflective 
 verb is followed by the regimen direct ; when that is 
 the case, the participle must not be made to agree 
 with any word or pronoun that precedes it, but must 
 remain invariable, because it is not preceded by its 
 direct regimen. Ex.: 
 
 Your mamma has imagined that. Voire maman s'est 
 
 imagine cela. 
 Your sister has made herself a fine gown. Voire soeur 
 
 s est fait une belle robe, 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 We esteem nothing more than the favour we are 
 requesting ; we esteem nothing less as soon as we 
 have received 41 it. Several of the changes our globe 
 has undergone, have been produced 42 by the motion 
 of the waters. The men who have lived longest are 
 not those who have reckoned the greatest number of 
 years, but those who have made the best use of 
 thosewhich heaven has allotted 41 to them. Stupendous 
 
 Superbe 
 mountains, who has established 41 you on your foun- 
 dations ? Who has raised 41 your summits above the 
 clouds ? Who has adorned 41 you with verdant fo- 
 rests ? What sight is preferable to that of the per- 
 sons we have rendered 41 happy ? Those very nations 
 which have been considered 41 as savage [nations,] 
 have admired and esteemed just, temperate and dis- 
 interested men. All the dignities which thou hast 
 asked 41 of me, I granted 41 them to thee immediately 
 and without trouble. Demetrius Phalerius, having 
 
EXERCISES. 129 
 
 been informed that the Athenians had overturned 
 his statues : they have not, said he, overturned the 
 virtue which [caused] them [to be] erected 41 to me. 
 Racine and Boileau, as long as they lived, gave 44 
 each other proofs of the sincerest esteem. In other 
 places, the water has formed 44 subterranean passages, 
 
 se pratiquer 
 into 32 which rivulets flow during part of the year. 
 Saturn, sprung from the union of heaven and earth, 
 had three sons, who (divided 44 among themselves) 
 
 se partager 
 the dominion of the universe. The glory of men , 
 ought always to be measured by the means they have 
 used 41 to acquire it. Some of our authors have 
 imagined 44 that they surpassed the ancients. It is 
 in the shade of peace that the arts were born, 42 have 
 prospered, and have been perfected. 41 Vice is a 
 malady of the soul, the morQ shameful, as those who 
 are attacked 42 by it, refuse to employ the remedies 
 which would have cured 41 them ; and indeed it , is 
 seldom we correct ourselves of the vices that have 
 once taken 41 possession of our hearts. What lessons 
 we should have lost, 41 if Cicero and Fenelon had 
 not given 41 themselves up to the study of wisdom ! 
 Many heroes have subjugated provinces, but few 
 have repressed their own passions and conquered 41 
 themselves. Epic poets have always delighted 41 in 
 describing battles. It is the trouble which an author 
 has given 41 himself, which causes his writings to be 
 read 42 with pleasure. How many ages have passed 41 
 away since the creation of the world ! How many 
 kings have succeeded 41 each other on the throne of 
 England ! The affair appearing of greater weight 
 
 grave 
 than was at first thought, the consuls resolved to 
 begin the war. A hundred years of inactivity are 
 g 5 
 
130 EXERCISES. 
 
 not worth one hour which we have known 43 how to 
 employ well. Calumny has always delighted 41 in 
 shedding its venom on the purest virtues. Not to 
 write correctly, evinces the little education we have 
 received. 41 Nero, once master of the supreme power, 
 did all the mischief he (could) 43 and committed all 
 
 pret. indef. 
 the cruelties he chose. 43 We cannot get rid of the 
 shame which nature has implanted 41 in us ; if we 
 wish to drive it from our hearts, it escapes into our 
 face. Bad news always has spread 41 faster than 
 good. Honour is like snow, which can never resume 
 its splendour and purity, as soon as it has once lost 41 
 them. Sir, said an informer to Louis de Bourbon, 
 the brother of Charles the Fifth, here is a memorial 
 which will inform you of several faults, which 32 per- 
 sons whom you have honoured 41 with your benevo- 
 lence, have committed 41 against you. Have you also 
 kept a register of the services they have done 41 
 me, replied the Prince ? Pericles was not long 
 before he eclipsed the reputation which 32 some fool- 
 ish declaimers and tiresome sophists had usurped. 41 
 Pygmalion ate nothing but fruit, which he had 
 gathered 41 himself in his own garden, or vegetables 
 which he had himself planted ; 41 and which he had 
 had 43 boiled. 
 
TWENTY-FOUR LESSONS 
 
 ON THE SYNTAX 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 the article le, la, les, the. 
 
 Rule 45. — A Substantive or any other part of speech used 
 substantively, taken in a general, determinate, or partitive 
 sense, requires the article, which agrees with that substantive 
 in gender and number, and must be repeated before each. 
 
 Man is mortal. Moderation is the wise manV 7 
 treasure. Virtue ennobles youth. The most extra- 
 ordinary 54 beauty is frail and mortal. Nothing 
 should be said 10 in [the] presence of females, that 
 can offend modesty, that can offend the ear of chastity. 
 Every one 152 agrees now that astrology is the vainest 
 and most uncertain science; but in the time of 
 
 de 
 Queen Catharine de Medici, it 101 was so much in 
 vogue, that nothing was done 10 without consulting* 
 
 * See note, page 27. 
 
132 EXERCISES. 
 
 astrologers. The father and mother of that child 
 are too kind. A man who is jealous of his repu- 
 tation, frequents good 75 and shuns bad society. He 
 is the richest and most liberal man that 21 I know. 
 Poetry is attracting. Cities are, during winter, pre- 
 ferable to the country. Man is only 149 estimable 
 as much as he unites goodness and uprightness of 
 heart to the talents and accomplishments of the 
 mind. Let fools talk, knowledge has its price. Eat- 
 ing and drinking have charms for him. The front 
 of the house. The top of the door. The God of 
 peace. Ciceros and Virgils are always rare. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Nature, says Salvian, requires only [what is] ne- 
 cessary ; reason will have [what is] useful ; self-love 
 seeks [what is] pleasant ; the passions require [what 
 is] superfluous. In order to* form a perfect society, 
 meum and tuum and all private interest should be 
 taken away. 10 Socrates is the first who 21 troubled 
 himself about morality. Pass the salt-cellar. Vir- 
 tuous men moderate their passions. Men who are 
 fond of study, are misers of their time. In the 
 golden age they 9 ate only 149 fruits and roots, and 
 drank water. We had soup, fish, roast meat, and 
 turkey for dinner ; and at the dessert, we had nuts, 
 apples, pears, grapes, figs, cakes, and Madeira and 
 Burgundy wine. Ignorance is the mother of admi- 
 ration, error, superstition and prejudice. The apple, 
 orange and cakes which you gave 41 me; and the 
 nuts, filberts and almonds which you bought 41 for 
 my sister, ought to be divided 42 between us. 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 133 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Rule 46. — The article is not used before substantives in 
 an enumeration ; the preposition de but no article is used 
 after words of quantity, after adverbs of negation or inter- 
 rogation, and before an adjective preceding a partitive sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 Parents, strangers, friends, children, all bewailed 
 him. Entreaties, kindnesses, offers, threats, nothing 
 could move him. 103 He has great talents, and a 
 great deal of wit : but few x friends and no money. 
 So much self-love does not become you. Catiline 
 had eloquence enough ; but little wisdom. He 
 has good teeth. 
 
 Exceptions. — When pas or point has no relation to the 
 substantive, and after the adverb of quantity bien, the article 
 is used. 
 
 I will not use any injurious expressions to you. So 
 dire mots 
 
 that we do not commit 20 gross faults, our master 
 generally* forgives us. It is many years since I saw 
 your father. 
 
 Mule 47. — When a partitive noun, with the adjective that 
 precedes it, convey but one idea to the mind, the article is 
 used. 
 
 That man possesses wit and literature. Happy, 
 
 belles-lettres 
 if in his time for very good reasons, Macedon had 
 had a lunatic asylum. 
 petites-maisons. 
 
 * See first note, page 3. 
 
134 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 48. — No article is used when an apostrophe is made. 
 Thou, you, and ye, before nouns apostrophized, are not to be 
 expressed. 
 
 Soldiers, follow me. 102 Answer, ye Heavens and 
 seas, and you, earth, speak. 0, you lazy [boy], 
 you naughty boy. Hold your tongue, you naughty 
 [girl]. Ye little birds, why do ye sing when I 
 am so sad ? 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Rule 49.— Proper names take no article, except the names 
 of some persons notorious for crime, those of actresses, and 
 some Italian names. 
 
 They 9 say that Lemaure kept up the bad operas 
 by the beauty of her voice. Tasso and Ariosto were 
 Italian Poets ; Titian and Poussin were painters. 
 Enchantments would not succeed now in France 52 
 nor in England; but in TassoV 7 time they were 
 received all over Europe. The ideas of " Jerusalem 
 Delivered" do not belong to Tasso, they are copied 
 from Ariosto. Champmesle was a famous actress. 
 Brinvilliers was a celebrated poisoner. 
 
 Rule 50.— -Before a saint's day, we use la, the word fete 
 being understood. 
 
 I will pay you on Michaelmas [day] • I shall leave 
 my house at Midsummer. It is St. Peter's day to- 
 day. To-morrow will be St. Catharine's day. When 
 is St. Nicholas' day ? 
 
 Rule 51. — Proper names of rivers, kingdoms, countries, 
 provinces, and distant parts, require the article. 
 
 Rule 52. — The names of some kingdoms, however, when 
 preceded by de or en, do not take the article. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 135 
 
 Rule 53.— An adjective used as the sur name f a sovereign 
 takes the article, except Cesar- August e , Philippe- Auguste, 
 Louis-Dieu-Donne, but a noun of number does not. 
 
 France is north of the Mediterranean. I come 
 from Japan, and am going to Jamaica. London is 
 on the river Thames, Paris is on the Seine. I am 
 going to England. I come from France. Charles 
 the Bold. Alexander the Great. Louis the Great 
 was the son of Louis the Just. George the Fourth 
 and Louis the Eighteenth were cotemporary. 
 
 Rule 54. — In a relative superlative, when the adjective 
 follows, the noun, as well as the adjective, takes the 
 article. 
 
 The most skilful people sometimes commit the 
 grossest faults. I am speaking of the most deli- 
 cate matter. The happiest man is he who thinks 
 himself so. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 Rule 55. — It is not necessary to repeat the article before 
 adjectives, unless the qualities they express be contrary or 
 opposite to each other. The word what, in a sense of ad' 
 miration or irony, may sometimes be expressed by the ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 The good and bad will have their reward. [Both] 
 young and old people should do their duty. Great 
 and memorable actions cannot give celebrity, unless 
 they have 20 virtue for [their] cause. The dreadful 
 and inexorable hard-heart edness of the rich is 
 the source of almost all human miseries. What a 
 beautiful evening ! Oh ! what a fine child ! What 
 a fine example to follow ! 
 
136 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 06. — The before a comparative, is not expressed, in 
 French ; the order of the sentence is, 1. plus, 2. the nomina- 
 tive and verb, 3. adjective; the rest as in English. 
 
 The more we desire a thing, the more it 101 seems 
 to recede. The richer a man is, the more 46 cares 
 he has. The more one drinks, the more one wants 
 to drink. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 a or AN. 
 
 Rule 57. — A, an, or per, is translated by the article before 
 nouns of weight, measure or quantity; by par before nouns 
 of time or distance. 
 
 Rule 58. — A or an must not be expressed after the word 
 what-, before cardinal or ordinal numbers in quotations; be- 
 fore names used in apposition, nor before a noun that indicates 
 the title, profession, trade, country, or any other attribute of 
 a former substantive. 
 
 I bought some apples to-day, at sixpence a dozen. 
 Butter is sold 12 at seven pence a pound. That cloth 
 is sold at seventeen shillings a yard. I have six bro- 
 thers : the first is a surgeon, the second a lawyer, 
 the third a cabinet-maker, the fourth a dancing- 
 master, the fifth a fencing-master, and the sixth a 
 bookseller. Are you an Englishman ? No, sir, I 
 am a Frenchman ; but I am neither a duke nor a 
 marquis, neither a priest nor a bishop ; lama poet, 
 sir. Telemachus, a work very much used in schools, 
 was written by Fenelon, Archbishop of Cambrai, 
 a very virtuous and learned man. What a fire ! 
 What a shame ! What an impudent [fellow] ! 
 
EXERCISES. 137 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Rule 59. — The Adjective, in French, agrees with its sub- 
 stantive in gender and number. 
 
 Demi, half, and nu, bare, are invariable when before a sub- 
 stantive, but agree with it when placed after; feu, late or de- 
 ceased, is invariable when before the article, but agrees when 
 after it. 
 
 Rule 60. — When an adjective, participle, or pronoun, im- 
 mediately follows several governed substantives, of different 
 genders, it agrees with the last; if they are all of the same 
 gender, it agrees accordingly; when they are separated from 
 the verb, it agrees with the most worthy gender. 
 
 Give me a good pen, and I will write a long letter. 
 Give me good apples, and I will eat them all. I am 
 going to put on my new* frock. We 9 find in most 152 
 courtiers only 149 an affected politeness and cordiality, 
 He has his feet and head bare. He has his head 
 and feet bare. There is in true virtue, a candour, an 
 ingenuity, in which we cannot mistake. The lowing 
 oxen and bleating sheep came in multitudes ; they 
 could not find stables enough to be at shelter. 
 
 Rule 61. — Adjectives used as adverbs are invariable. 
 
 She sings false. They speak loud. She stopped 
 short. Walk straight, miss. Sit upright, miss. 
 
 However we say : 
 
 Une nouvelle mariSe. A new married lady. 
 
 Une nouvelle venue, A new comer (f). 
 
 Des fleurs fraiches cueillies. Fresh gathered flowers. 
 
 * See note, page 25. 
 
138 EXERCISES. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 TOUT. 
 
 Rule 62. — The whole, unaccompanied by a noun, is ex- 
 pressed by le tout. 
 
 Rule 63,-— -For the whole or all, followed by a substantive, 
 use tout le, toute la, fyc. 
 
 Rule 64.-— For all or every thing, when immediately fol- 
 lowed by a verb, use tout without article or gender. 
 
 Rule 65. — Every, before a noun singular, is expressed by 
 tout, toute, but requires no article, except in every body, 
 tout le monde ; but before a plural, it takes gender, number, 
 and the article. 
 
 Rule 66.— The w r ord tout in tout ce qui, tout ce que, all or 
 every thing that, is invariable. 
 
 Rule 67.- — Tout, signifying quite, entirely, or the former as, 
 in a sentence, varies only before a substantive feminine 
 beginning with a consonant. 
 
 The whole is good for nothing. The whole often 
 consists in what 136 appears nothing. All the pains 
 I have taken are lost. 42 All is lost. Every thing 
 vexes me. Every man may lie ; but every man does 
 not lie. It is a folly to 148 wish to please everybody. 
 The English assemble every year at Christmas, to* 
 eat plum-pudding 45 and roast-beef. All that you 
 say does not persuade me. He criticised every thing 
 I said. In whatever you do, be not hasty. (Away 
 
 Loin 
 with) those maxims of flattery, that kings are born 
 de moi 
 skilful, and that their souls emanate from God quite 
 
 * See note second, page 3. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 139 
 
 good and wise. The greatest philosophers, as enlight- 
 ened as they are, do not know the cause of many na- 
 tural effects. 
 
 Whatever, however, howsoever, though ever so. 
 
 Rule 68. — Whatever, before substantives, and however, 
 howsoever, though ever so, before an adjective, are trans- 
 lated by quelque followed by que, the next verb in tbe sub- 
 junctive. The order, in French, is: 1st, quelque — 2nd, 
 adjective or substantive — 3rd, que — 4th, nominative and 
 verb ; should the nominative however be a substantive, put 
 it after the verb. 
 
 Rule 69. — Quelque takes an s only before a substantive 
 plural. 
 
 Though ever so skilful and enlightened, let us not 
 make a vain display of our knowledge. Whatever 
 riches you may* enjoy, whatever advantages you 
 may possess, you will not be happy, if you cannot 
 repress your passions. 
 
 Rule 70. — For whatever, followed by a substantive and 
 the verb to be, use quel que, in two words, making quel 
 agree with the substantive. 
 
 Whatever your birth or your dignities may be, 
 you should* despise no one. Whatever your confi- 
 dence in him may be, you do wrong to trust him so 
 much. 
 
 Rule 71. — Quelque chose, something anything, is mascu- 
 line. 
 
 Rule 72. — Excepte and suppose are prepositions, when 
 placed before, and adjectives when placed after, a substan- 
 tive. 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
140 EXERCISES. 
 
 Do you see any thing on earth that is permanent ? 
 Except your sisters, all the family looks sad. Sup- 
 pose these principles, what follows ? Your sisters 
 excepted, all the family looks sad. These principles 
 being supposed, what follows ? 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 THE PARTICLE le. 
 
 Mule 73. — The word so, whether understood or not in 
 English, must, in French, be expressed by le invariable, 
 whenever it relates to an adjective, participle, or verb pre- 
 ceding, and by the article when it refers to a substantive. 
 
 Are you certain of that, miss ? Yes, I think I 
 am. Are you related, ladies ? Yes, we are. Nobi- 
 lity, granted to the fathers, because they were virtu- 
 ous, has been left to the children, that they might 
 become so. Is she convinced of her mistake ? No; 
 but she soon will be. Are you this gentleman's 
 sister ? Yes, sir ; I am. Madam, are you married ? 
 Yes ; I am. 
 
 Rule 74. — Le is also invariable before plus, moms, and 
 mieux, when it forms, with these words, a superlative adverb. 
 It is likewise invariable in a superlative, where there is no 
 comparison. jhL 
 
 The good use of time is one of the things which 
 /Contribute most to our happiness. One of the 
 things which tire most, and of which we are least 
 aware, are useless repetitions. 45 That woman does 
 not weep even when she is most afflicted. He had so 
 much 46 affection for his children, that he could not 
 resolve to punish them, even when they were most 
 guilty. 
 
EXERCISES. 141 
 
 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule 75.— -All the pronominal adjectives, except quelconque, 
 all numeral adjectives, except after the name of a sovereign; 
 beau, grand, mechant, petit, saint, vieux, bon, gros, vrai, long, 
 vilain, cruel, honnUe, jeune, mauvais, aimable, and pauvre, 
 are always placed before their substantives. Cher is put 
 before when it means beloved, and after when it means 
 costly; all other adjectives may, in the familiar style, be 
 safely put after their substantives. 
 
 Some other adjectives may, in peculiar expressions, be 
 found before their substantives, as : un blanc bee, a beardless 
 youth ; un rouge trogne, a drunkard's face ; une verte vieil- 
 lesse, hale old-age ; un vert galant, an active, gallant young 
 man, &c. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS de AND OL. 
 
 Rule 76. — After any word of quantity, scarcity, plenty ; 
 after sorte, espece, melange, quelque chose, rien, and que and 
 quoi used as admiratives, put the preposition de. 
 
 A confectioner sells all kinds of sweetmeats. What 
 is 139 more sad, than to see the father of [a] family 
 
 un 
 lose all his property? What experience adversity 
 gives us ! Something more than birth is required 
 to make us^reat. Fifty pounds of wheat contain 
 forty pounds of flour. Nothing is rarer than a true 
 friend. It is better to have few enemies, than many 
 friends. I have something rare to show you. What 
 species of animal is that ? It is a mixture of wine 
 and cider. If we 9 are poor in whatever we covet, 
 the avaricious and ambitious are in extreme poverty : 
 if we are rich in what we do not covet, the wise man 
 is truly rich. 
 
142 EXERCISES. 
 
 Rule 77. — The English possessive case must have its natu- 
 ral construction, in French, thus : My brother s book will be - 
 the book of my brother. 
 
 Yonder is my uncle's house. He is my father's 
 intimate friend. My grandmother's brother's wife 
 is still alive. A boys' school. St. James's-street. 
 St. Thomas's hospital. 
 
 Rule 78. — When, in English, two words meet, forming a 
 compound word, the former expressing the nature, quality or 
 country of the latter, the former is placed last, in French, and 
 takes de before it. 
 
 Rule 79. — When, however, the former expresses the use of 
 the latter, the preposition a must be used, and if it is the 
 name of any thing eatable, the article must be used too. 
 
 He always wears a red cotton night-cap. I am 
 very fond of Burgundy wine. It is a brick house. 
 You want a hand-saw. Whose 128 wind-mill is that ? 
 It is a water-mill. Are you fond of apple-pie ? I 
 am just come from the fish-market. Where is the 
 poultry-market ? 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 Rule 80. — When a noun taken in a general or indetermi- 
 nate sense follows a participle and the preposijton of, by, with 
 or from, it must be preceded by de only. IT the noun be 
 taken in a specified or determinate sense, the article, of course, 
 must be used. 
 
 He* is a young man endued with virtue. Alex- 
 ander usedf to send his enemies away loaded with 
 presents. He is deprived of every [thing]. The 
 arts are loaded with a prodigious nember of rules, 
 
 * See note, page 32. t See note, page 20. 
 
EXERCISES. 143 
 
 which are [either] useless or false. The world ^s 
 full of critics, who, by dint of commentaries, defini- 
 tions and distinctions, have succeeded in rendering 
 obscure the clearest and simplest sciences. He is a 
 young man endued with the qualities requisite for 
 such an office. The enemies of Alexander went 
 away loaded with the presents he had made them. 
 
 Rule 81. — After passive participles use de if they express 
 an emotion of the mind, and par if the hody alone is con- 
 cerned ; but to avoid repetitions use de or par indiscrimi- 
 nately. See Rule 10. 
 
 An ignorant and proud young man is despised by 
 all who know him. Rome was built by Romulus. 
 The Gauls were subdued by Csesar. Your work has 
 been praised, in a very delicate manner, by a great 
 academician. A great part of the earth has been 
 conquered by the Romans. My sons, you will be 
 loved and esteemed by all who know you, if you are 
 good and modest. His conduct was unanimously 
 approved of by all honest people. 
 
 Rule 82. — A participle or adjective after a cardinal num- 
 ber takes de before it. 
 
 There were three thousand men killed, five hun- 
 dred wounded, and fourteen hundred taken pri- 
 soners. 
 
 Rule 83. — An adjective of dimension is elegantly turned 
 into a substantive with de before it, de being also put before 
 the noun of number ; but when avoir is used instead of etre, 
 to be, de is omitted before the noun of number. 
 
 Rule 84. — By, after a comparative, and than, before a noun 
 of number, are both expressed by de. 
 
 Rule 85. — In, after a relative superlative, is expressed 
 by de. 
 
144 EXERCISES. 
 
 • The walls of Babylon were two hundred feet high, 
 and fifty feet broad. The well in our garden is 
 thirty feet deep. You are a head taller than I am. 
 Your foot is longer than mine by two inches. I have 
 lost more than twelve guineas. Those apples are 
 more than half rotten. He is the most important 
 man in the city. He is the happiest man in the 
 world. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 Rule 86. — After adjectives, followed, in English, by in; 
 after those which signify aptness, fitness, readiness, likeness, 
 or their contraries ; after sensible, insensible, attentif, insup- 
 portable, and many others of like signification, a must be 
 used. Some adjectives, and chiefly those which express 
 amiable qualities, followed in English by to, require envers 
 in French. 
 
 Mankind, ever ready to enter into unsuccessful 
 quarrels about religion, have seen to what excess the 
 spirit of party can lead at last. All mankind are 
 subject to death. There are many things good to 
 eat, which are disagreeable to my taste. Your bro- 
 ther is very prone to idleness. Our dress is not like 
 that of the ancients. Less attentive to please the 
 world than his God, the wise man laughs at the 
 opinions of men. The wise man, exact in his duty, 
 fears neither present evils, nor misfortunes to come. 
 God is merciful to all. 
 
 CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Rule 87. — A noun of multitude, when it conveys to the 
 mind an idea of totality, governs the verb in the singular ; 
 when it does not, it is the noun by which it is immediately 
 followed which governs the verb. 
 
 Rule 88. — La plupart, used by itself, requires a plural. 
 So many years of intercourse were chains of iron 
 
EXERCISES. 145 
 
 that attached nie to those two men. We 9 see a 
 great number of persons capable of performing a wise 
 action ; we see still a greater number capable of per- 
 forming a skilful and cunning action ; but very few 
 are capable of performing a generous one. The little 
 patience he evinced, proves him to be impatient. 
 Most people are equally ready to receive impressions, 
 and negligent in examining them. Most people 
 agree that he is in the wrong. The infidels' army was 
 entirely defeated. The forest of Ardennes is west 
 of Luxembourg. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 Rule 89. — Several nouns singular require a verb plural ; 
 but when not united by a copulative conjunction, the verb 
 may remain in the singular. 
 
 Rule 90. — When the nouns are nearly synonymous, even 
 though united by a conjunction, the verb may remain in the 
 singular. When the nominatives are united by the disjunc- 
 tive ou, the verb agrees with the last. 
 
 The mild behaviour, the kindness of Henry the 
 Great,, has been celebrated by a thousand praises. 
 It is not necessary that the whole universe should 
 arm itself to destroy man ; a vapour, a single drop 
 of water, is sufficient to kill him. The king and the 
 shepherd are equal after death. The tumult and 
 agitation that surround the throne, banish from it all 
 reflections, and never leave the sovereign to himself. 
 His piety and uprightness gained him that respect. 
 Their anxiety and grief are the effect of the punish- 
 ment of sin. Fear or impotence prevented them from 
 moving. 
 
 Rule 91. — When the subjects are of different persons, even 
 when united by on, the verb agrees in the plural with the 
 H 
 
146 EXERCISES. 
 
 first person rather than the second, and with the second 
 rather than the third, and the plural pronoun of the most 
 worthy person is placed before the verb. 
 
 Rule 92. — Neither followed by nor is expressed by ni re- 
 peated. Neither is expressed by ni Tun ni V autre ; both 
 govern the verb, with ne before it, if both can affect the 
 action of the verb ; if not, the verb must be in the singular 
 number. 
 
 Either you or I will go. Either you or he is 
 wrong. Your brother and I are going to France. 
 You and your brother are both very idle. Neither 
 glory nor grandeur makes us happy. It will be 
 neither the duke nor the count that will be ap- 
 pointed ambassador. Neither mildness nor violence 
 can avail anything in it. Neither he nor I have ever 
 studied. They might both have been mistaken, but 
 neither was mistaken. 
 
 Rule 93. — The word both, when followed by and, is ex- 
 pressed, in French, by et, or left out altogether. 
 
 Rule 94. — When followed by a substantive, both is expressed 
 by les deux. 
 
 Rule 95. — When used by itself, as a nominative, in refer- 
 ence to two substantives, both is expressed by Vun et V autre, 
 and governs the verb in the plural. 
 
 Rule 96. — When both, either, or each other, is governed by 
 the verb, it is expressed by Vun V autre ; and if the verb re- 
 quire a preposition, that preposition must be placed between 
 them. 
 
 The liar and the flatterer are equally contemptible ; 
 both make a very bad use of the free gift of speech. 
 I have a great esteem for both. He says no good of 
 either. Show me a provincial town, where the inha- 
 bitants do not slander each other. Henry the 
 
EXERCISES. 14? 
 
 Fourth, and Elizabeth, had a great esteem for each 
 other. I have read both the letters, they pleased 
 me much. 
 
 Both chaste Diana and august Juno shall gua- 
 rantee the performance of my sacred promises. 
 Wolves do not fight against each other, nor give 
 each other ugly wounds with pointed instruments ; 
 in fine, they do not kill each other. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 97. — Familiarity alone can authorise the use of tu, te, 
 tot, ton, ta, tes, le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. 
 
 Rule 98. — In addressing persons, whose birth or station 
 claims ceremonious respect, make their title the subject of 
 the verb ; if no title, use Monsieur, to a gentleman, Madame, 
 to a married lady, and Mademoiselle, to a young lady : use 
 the same before the names of any of their relatives of whom 
 you speak. 
 
 Do you wish me, My Lord, to relate that story ? 
 Will you have the kindness, sir, to tell me what 
 o'clock it is ? Will you permit me, madam, to offer 
 you an orange ? How does your mother do ? Will 
 your sisters honour us with their company to tea this 
 evening ? I am sorry your brother cannot come. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 99. — The personal pronouns, in the nominative, are 
 expressed hyje, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, elles. 
 
 Rule 100. — Before or after qui, que and seul; after prepo- 
 sitions (provided they do not refer to inanimate objects) ; in 
 answer to questions ; when joined by a conjunction to a noun 
 H 2 
 
148 EXERCISES. 
 
 or another pronoun ; in fine, when any distinction, opposi- 
 tion or particular emphasis is used, the personal pronouns are 
 expressed by moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles. 
 
 Rule 101. — It is expressed by elle, and theyhy elles, when 
 they refer to feminine nouns. 
 
 I am reading. We are working. I only pity 
 myself. Is it they who are speaking, or you or he ? 
 Is it they whom I see disputing yonder ? They alone 
 shall be punished. In so great a reverse of fortune, 
 what have you left ? Myself. Who knocks ? It 
 is I. He and they shall go; you and I will stay. 
 I stopped and he went away. My sister and they 
 are arrived. He prefers France, and I, England. 
 He likes wine, and I prefer beer. Scopas has writ- 
 ten a book against you. He ! I forgive him with all 
 my heart. It is impossible for a man of a bad dis- 
 position to love the public good ; for how could he 
 love a million of men, he who has never loved any 
 one ? You have spoken ill of me. I speak well of 
 you, you speak ill of me ; how great is our misfor- 
 tune ! neither of us are believed. Consider how 
 avarice corrupts everything, how it overthrows every- 
 thing, how it treats men, not as slaves, but as beasts. 
 Lend me your knife. — No, I mend my pens with it. 
 — I could not write a quarter of an hour without it. 
 Do you see yonder tree ? — Yes, your brother is 
 seated under it, and your sisters are standing by it. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Rale 102. — Personal pronouns in the objective case, after 
 the first or second person of an imperative affirmative* are 
 translated by moi, toi, lui, nous, vous, le, la, les, ieur. 
 
 Rule 103. — When two imperatives affirmative meet, the 
 governed pronouns are placed after the former and before 
 
EXERCISES. 149 
 
 the latter. After any other tense, they are expressed 
 me, te, se, le, la, no\, -:. les, which are always placed 
 
 befor- the verb, and in the compound tenses before the 
 anxil: 
 
 Listen to me : give me some money. I dc 
 find myself disposed to sleep. I take thee for wit- 
 ness. God, who madest me. He sees himself now 
 obliged to surrender. I see him. I see her. I 
 them. He loves us. He loves you. He loves him- 
 self. Separate them, father, and let me die. Either 
 give or lend it to me. 
 
 Rule 104. — When the French verb governs de, express the 
 sonal pronouns as after a preposition, except him, her. it 
 and them, for which use en, 
 
 R:."-: 105. — The words some, or a :::/. when used alone, in 
 to something before mentioned, are rendered by 
 
 Do you often speak oi my sisters, at your house ? 
 Yes. we very often speak of them ; my brother is 
 quite delighted with them, but my father has com- 
 plained of thern, more than once ; he says they are 
 never serious. I have some oranges : have you any ? 
 Yes, I have some ; but you may give me some of 
 yours, if you like. 
 
 E: le 106. — When the verb requires the preposition a to 
 
 be expressed, use the personal pronouns as after a preposi- 
 
 :::r ; bv.: vrher. :: is ::•:■: necessary to express a, use me, te, 
 
 -:ur, before the verb. For Jul, to it, and 
 
 referring to any inanimate objects, except 
 
 plants, use y. 
 
 Rule 107. — When, however, inanimate objects are perso- 
 e i, you may use lui, for to it, and leur, for to them. 
 
 Rule 10S. — r and en are sometimes adverbs. 
 He often speaks to me about you. Does he ever 
 
150 EXERCISES. 
 
 speak to you about me ? He never speaks to us. 
 Is lie fond of my cousins ? No, lie never speaks to 
 them. Fetch your slate and tie a sponge to it. You 
 are wrong to listen to those tales ; I pay no atten- 
 tion to them myself. Take this bird and clip its 
 wings. This plant wants water, you must give it 
 some. Those trees are too loaded, you must take 
 part of the fruit off them. Keep that sword, you 
 owe your life to it. That book cost me dear ; but I 
 am indebted to it for all I know of the French lan- 
 gauge. Have you been to Calais ? Yes, I have 
 been there several times, I am just arrived from there 
 now. 
 
 Rule 109. — The impersonal verb it is, must be translated 
 by cest, except only before eux, elles or a substantive plural, 
 then use ce sont ; when used interrogatively, the answer must 
 be preceded by ce. 
 
 Rule 110.— After peut-etre, au moins, aussi, ainsi, and en 
 vain, at the beginning of a sentence, the pronominal nomina- 
 tives may be placed after their verbs. 
 
 Rule 111.— The nominative cannot be separated from its 
 verb by an adverb; but only by ne or a pronoun. 
 
 It is the number of the people and the abundance 
 of food which constitute the real strength and the 
 true wealth of a kingdom. It is the ungrateful, the 
 liars, the flatterers, who have extolled vice. It is 
 they who are speaking. Is that your knife ? Yes, 
 it is. Are those your children? Yes, they are. 
 Perhaps he will succeed, with the assistance of his 
 friends. She had scarcely opened her bed-room 
 door, than several of her servants took refuge there. 
 I do not like your brother, he always asks me so 
 many foolish questions. 
 
EXERCISES. 151 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 Rule 112. — When several governed pronouns meet, this 
 is their order : 
 
 Me, te, se, nous, vous, come before le, la, les, 
 Le, la, les, before lui, leur. 
 
 Lui, leur, before y. 
 
 Y, before en. 
 
 Rule 113. — Except when moi and y meet, then y comes 
 before moi, and if the verb be in the second person singular 
 of the imperative, an s must be added, if it have not one. 
 
 Rule 114. — When moi and en meet, they are contracted 
 into m'en* 
 
 Lend me your book, I will return It to you to-mor- 
 row ; if you refuse it me I dare say I shall be able 
 to do without it. I will speak to them about it, and 
 will give you an exact account of it. Transport me 
 thither. Conduct me thither. Do not eat all the 
 cake, give me a small piece of it. 
 
 Rule 115, — The pronouns of the first and second persons 
 are usually repeated, those of the third are repeated only 
 when the verbs are in different tenses, when one is negative, 
 and the other affirmative, or after conjunctions, except et 
 and ni. 
 
 You shall love your enemies, bless them that curse 
 you, do good to them that persecute you, and pray 
 for them that speak ill of you. I maintain and 
 always will, that one cannot be happy without virtue. 
 They are and always will be in error. They are 
 poor, because they are indolent. He is foolish, but 
 not wicked. Whilst the king was reading, Clement 
 struck him and left the knife in the wound. The 
 king was seated ; he rose, pulled the knife out of 
 
152 EXERCISES. 
 
 his body, and struck the murderer on the forehead 
 with it. 
 
 Rule 116. — Himself, herself, themselves, are expressed by se 
 when the verb is reflective, by lui-meme, elle-meme, eux- 
 memes, elles-memes, when the verb is not reflective, or after a 
 preposition, and never by soL One's self is expressed by 
 soi; so likewise is itself, when it refers to a noun, taken in a 
 general sense, or to an indefinite pronoun. 
 
 He thinks himself unhappy. She gives herself a 
 great deal of useless trouble. They found them- 
 selves unable to fight. Your sister is always speak- 
 ing of herself. Indiscretion often betrays itself. 
 
 Such is the eternal command of the God we serve ; 
 [He] himself marked us out his temple and his altar. 
 To excuse in one's self the foolish things that we 9 
 cannot bear in others, is to prefer being a fool one's 
 self than to see others so. We often stand in need 
 of an humbler [person] than ourselves. Egotists think 
 only of themselves. Authors suspect what presents 
 itself to them of its own accord. Loadstone attracts 
 iron. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 117. — Possessive pronouns agree with the noun which 
 they precede, and must be repeated ; they are used, though 
 not in English, before the names of relations. 
 
 Rule 118. — When the verb expresses an action over any 
 part of the body, instead of the possessive pronouns, we use 
 me, te, se, lui, nous, vous, or leur, before the verb, and put the 
 article before the substantive. 
 
 His father, mother and sisters, are all ill. His 
 brother and sister, and my father and mother, were 
 
EXERCISES. 153 
 
 at the theatre last night. Mother, I have lost my 
 gloves. "Well, daughter, look for them. My bro- 
 ther has broken his leg : not a day passes but some 
 accident happens to the family ; yesterday, Caroline 
 cut her little finger ; last week, George had a fall 
 and hurt his heel ; and, about a fortnight ago, you 
 know, I myself broke my arm. I have a pain in 
 my head, and my tooth aches. Your brother has 
 broken his slate. 
 
 Rule 119. — We make use of dame, demoiselle, and seigneur, 
 instead of madame, mademoiselle, and monseigneur, when we 
 have occasion to put an article, pronoun or adjective before 
 them. 
 
 Rule 120. — Monsieur, madame and mora seigneur are some- 
 times followed by an article ; monsieur may even take a pro- 
 noun before it. 
 
 The president, the countess, and the bishop, were 
 there. Those gentlemen are Germans : the gentle- 
 man that follows them is a Frenchman. That lady 
 is blind ; that young lady is her daughter. 
 
 Rule 121. — Its and their are expressed by son, sa, ses, leur, 
 leurs, when the word to which they relate is the nominative 
 to the preceding verb ; when not, use en before the verb, and 
 put the article before the substantive. 
 
 Rule 122. — The article should be used instead of the pos- 
 sessive pronoun, whenever the sense sufficiently indicates the 
 possessor. 
 
 That garden is delightful, do you not admire the 
 beauty of its walks, and the simplicity of its par- 
 terres. The river Seine has its rise in Burgundy, 
 and its fall in Havre de Grace. The king's palace is 
 a magnificent building, but its gates are too nar- 
 row. Your letter, which you took so much pains to 
 h 5 
 
154 EXERCISES. 
 
 compose, was not received. Your horses, of which 
 you boast so much, are riot so fine as mine. Your 
 hands, which you take care to wash six times a day, 
 will never be so fair as your mother's. 
 
 Rule 123. — The personal pronouns, in the possessive case, 
 are expressed by mon, ton, son, &c, when they follow a sub- 
 stantive and the preposition of. 
 
 Rule 124. — Mine, thine, &c, after the verb to be, are ren- 
 dered by a moi, a toi, &c, otherwise mine, thine, his, &c, are 
 expressed by le mien, le tien, le sien, &c. 
 
 A friend of yours told me this morning, that you 
 wish to take a house of mine at Paris. This hat is 
 yours, the other is mine. This is your book, I think ? 
 No, it is mine. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 125. — Ce, this or that, must be repeated before each 
 substantive. When this and that are used before two nouns 
 in the same sentence, the noun after this takes ci ; and the 
 noun after that takes la. Celui-ci, celui-la, are used for this, 
 that, or the former, the latter, in reference to two nouns before 
 spoken of. Ceci and cela are used in reference to indeter- 
 minate objects. 
 
 All these apples, pears, plums and nuts are out 
 of my garden. The body perishes, the soul is im- 
 mortal ; yet the former has all our attention, whilst 
 the latter is neglected. I do not like this ; give me 
 some of that. 
 
 Rule 126. — The word that or those, followed by of, is 
 expressed by celui de, celle de, &c. ; that or those, followed 
 by which, is also expressed by celui, celle,, &c, and which, 
 
EXERCISES. 155 
 
 by qui or que, according as it is the subject or object of the 
 verb. 
 
 The pleasures of the mind are more lasting than 
 those of the body. Your horses are not so fine as 
 my father's; nor is your coach so pretty as my 
 uncle's. The apples you have bought are better 
 than those which have been 10 given to me. One 
 cannot have a more interesting book than that which 
 I am now reading. 31 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 127. — Who is expressed by qui; whom, by que, when 
 the direct object of the verb, and by qui, after a preposition ; 
 whose, by dont, when it comes immediately after the substan- 
 tive, and by de qui, if not; and from whom, invariably by 
 de quL 
 
 Rule 128. — The interrogative whose, is translated by a qui, 
 which must be placed immediately before the verb, and the 
 answer must be made a moi, d lui, &c. 
 
 The young man who is docile will infallibly pos- 
 sess some merit. The lady whom you often see at 
 our house is not married. The gentleman in whose 
 company I was yesterday evening speaks French 
 very well. Lying is a vice for which you cannot 
 have too much horror. The gentleman you speak 
 of is a Dutchman. Mr. C._, to whose generosity I 
 owe all that I possess, is lately dead. The friends 
 to whom we wish to give our confidence should be 
 well chosen. He from whom I have received this 
 money still owes me fifteen hundred francs. Whose 
 books are these ? They are yours. 
 
156 EXERCISES. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 Rule 129. — Which is expressed by qui when in the nomi- 
 native, and by que when in the objective case; but after a 
 preposition, or to avoid repetition or ambiguity, it is ex- 
 pressed by lequel, laquelle, &c. : of which is expressed by 
 dont, when it immediately follows its antecedent, but, if 
 separated from it by another noun, by duquel, de laquelle, 
 &c. 
 
 That doctrine, which places the sovereign good 
 in the pleasures of the body, is quite unworthy of a 
 philosopher. The goodness of God, the effects of 
 which we feel every day, ought to induce us to 
 practise his commandments. Let us render our- 
 selves capable of fulfilling the duties of the state 
 to which God has called us. There was a little lamp 
 there, by the light of which I could see all that was 
 passing. As soon as I had got rid of the affairs 
 of court, I went to the man who had spoken to me 
 about the marriage of Madame de Miranion, who 
 seemed to me of the same opinion. They resemble 
 those nations who inhabit the torrid zone, who dart 
 arrows against the sun. 
 
 Rule 130. — He, she, they or those, before who, is expressed 
 by celui, celle ; ceux, celles. 
 
 Rulel3]. — In the elevated style, he who may be expressed 
 by qui alone. 
 
 Rule 132. — Celui, celle, cannot be separated from qui ex- 
 cept by the participle la. 
 
 He who receives more than he spends, is truly rich. 
 He whose expense exceeds his revenue, is poor. He 
 w T ho has no education, resembles a body without a 
 
EXERCISES. 157 
 
 soul. He is rich, who receives more than he spends. 
 He is poor, whose expense exceeds his revenue. We 
 always hate [him] who obliges us to fear him. 
 
 Rule 133. — Which, after a preposition and a verb signi- 
 fying motion, at least figuratively, is expressed by ou. 
 
 Rule 134. — Ou and d'ou are adverbs of place as well as 
 pronouns. 
 
 Rule 135. — Qui cannot relate to a verb, ce must be put be- 
 fore it. When which, preceded by a preposition, relates to a 
 noun which has the same preposition before it, it is expressed 
 by que, without the preposition. 
 
 Study 45 frees us from the errors into which the 
 prejudices of a bad education had plunged us. 103 
 Henry the Fourth 53 considered the good education 
 of youth as a thing on which depended the happi- 
 ness of kingdoms and nations. The angel warned 
 the shepherds not 158 to take the same road by which 
 they had come to Bethlehem. The family* that 
 Tasso 49 came from was one of the most illustrious 
 in Italy, and had for a long time been one of the 
 most powerful. The house which your friend has 
 just come out of, belongs to my uncle. Which way 
 do you pass when you go tof your uncle's ? 98 
 Where are you going now ? Whence do you come ? 
 You eat much and sleep often, which is very inju- 
 rious to health. A fountain cannot throw up soft 
 water by the same pipe through which it 101 throws 
 
 * Obs. — When maison is used to signify family, ou must 
 not be used. The family from which he springs, La maison 
 dont il sort. La maison d'ou il sort would signify, the house 
 he is coming out of. 
 
 t dt or to (a person's house) is expressed by che%, as : 
 At your house Chez vous. 
 
 At your cousin's Chez M. voire cousin. 
 
158 EXERCISES. 
 
 up salt water. I received your letter with all the 
 satisfaction with which such an honour ought to 
 be received. 10 It is but 149 tyrants of whom I com- 
 plain. It is you to whom it belongs to regulate this 
 kind of business. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 WHAT. 
 
 Rule 136. — Whatis expressed by ce qui, when the subject; 
 by ce que, when the direct object of the verb; by ce dont, 
 when the verb governs de ; and by ce a quoi, when the verb 
 governs a after it. 
 
 Rule 137. — When ce qui or ce que begins a sentence, ob- 
 serve to put ce also before the second verb, unless immediately 
 followed by an adjective. 
 
 What surprises me is, that so small a town should 17 
 be so well fortified. That is what 32 all foreigners 
 say. It is what they are always speaking of here, 
 and it is to what I pay the least attention. 
 
 What I cannot endure, is a man who is always 
 talking to you about his own affairs. What I have 
 told you is too true. 
 
 Rule 138. — Quoi is used as a relative whenever it has ce, 
 rien, or part of a sentence, for its antecedent. 
 
 Rule 139. — When quoi is used in a sense of admiration, the 
 verb is omitted. 
 
 Rule 140. — Wherewith or enough to, in a like sense, is ex- 
 pressed by de quoi. 
 
 There is nothing on which 21 so much has been 
 
EXERCISES. 159 
 
 written. 10 The diseases of the mind are the most 
 dangerous, we should* labour to cure them ; yet it 
 is what we 9 little think of. With prodigality, you 
 will be generous for six months ; after which you 
 will no longer be able to be so : 73 with wise eco- 
 nomy, you will be generous all your lifetime. What 
 is more pleasing to parents, than virtuous children ? 
 He has wherewith to be contented. That man is 
 disconsolate because he has lost a thousand francs, 
 yet he has enough to live [on] . A just commenda- 
 tion is enough to flatter us. He is a man who 
 has good property. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 141. — Which, followed by of, is expressed by lequel, 
 laquelle, &c. 
 
 Rule 142. — What, followed by a substantive, is translated 
 by quel, quelle, &c. 
 
 Rule 143. — What, without a substantive, is rendered by 
 que or qu'est-ce que ? See Rule 5. 
 
 Rule 144. — Is this? Is that? Are these ? &c., are ex- 
 pressed by Est-ce-la, ? Sont-ce-la, ? 
 
 Which of these cloths do you like best ? Which 
 of your cousins learns Italian ? Which of your sis- 
 ters is married ? What books are you reading ? 
 At what chapter are you now ? What do you say ? 
 What does your mother 32 say ? I did not hear her. 
 Is this your book ? Are these your gloves ? Is that 
 your friend ? Are those your friends ? 
 
 * See note, page 32. 
 
160 EXERCISES. 
 
 LESSON XXL 
 
 QUE. 
 
 Rule 145. — Que when used for whether, at the beginning 
 of a sentence, governs the subjunctive mood; when used to 
 prevent ihe repetition of si, it requires the subjunctive, but 
 for comme or quand, in the middle of a sentence, it does 
 not. 
 
 Whether he go or stay, you will lose nothing by it. 
 If he go and I know it, I will never forgive him. 
 You always come to see me on the days when I am 
 busy. As he desired it, and as I could do it, I did 
 not refuse him. 
 
 Rule 146. — Que is used, in the middle of a sentence, instead 
 of many conjunctions composed of que, and governs the same 
 mood as those conjunctions : it is also used instead ofcependant, 
 and for pourquoi, at the beginning of a sentence, with the 
 indicative. 
 
 Rule 147. — Instead of repeating conjunctions composed of 
 que or de, the que or de only is repeated. 
 
 Come hither, in order that I may hear you say your 
 lesson. Kings should never undertake a war, unless 
 it be both useful and necessary. You must not 
 go to play before you have said your lessons. En- 
 deavour to send him the money without any one 
 knowing it. Manage so that he may receive it to- 
 morrow. I am surprised that you have not found 
 your books again. Make haste to be gone, for fear 
 your father should find you here. It is two years 
 since I saw him. Are all the cups broken, since 
 none are brought to me ? Wait until your mother 
 comes. If I do not go to see you, it is because I 
 have not time. Why do you not come to see me ? 
 
EXERCISES. 161 
 
 you will always be welcome. Though misers had 
 all the gold in Peru, yet they would wish for more 
 still. Scipio acquired nothing, although he had been 
 the master of Carthage, and had enriched his soldiers 
 more than any other general. When a man is given 
 up to his passions, and is known for what he is, 
 he lives dishonoured; and those who apparently 
 flatter him, truly despise him. In order to convince 
 him and to cure him of all hope, I showed him my 
 marriage certificate. 
 
 Rule 148. — When the verb to be comes between two ex- 
 pressions, either of which might be made the subject of the 
 verb, the more important part of the sentence is put last in 
 French, with que de before it, if in the infinitive ; and que 
 only, if not. 
 
 Rule 149. — Que is used for as or than, to unite two terms 
 of comparison ; for but or only, with ne before the verb, to 
 restrain a negative sentence ; and finally to express desire, 
 command, imprecation, or indignation, in which case the sub- 
 junctive mood is used. 
 
 To keep a secret is a glorious thing. To see the 
 father of a family lose all his property is a very sad 
 thing. The folly of the crusades was a very strange 
 thing. Asia is much larger than Europe. My eldest 
 sister is but fourteen. Let him go, I do not want 
 him. Let him be led to execution. Cursed be he 
 who corrupts the morals of youth. 
 
162 EXERCISES. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 ON. 
 
 Rule 150.— On (see Rules 9 and 10) must be repeated be- 
 fore each verb. 
 
 Rule 151. — On becomes Von, after et, si, ou, and after que 
 when a word beginning with com or con follows ; should, how- 
 ever, le, la, or les, appear in the sentence, on alone should be 
 used. 
 
 They assemble, they conspire, they spread alarms, 
 each citizen becomes a soldier, all Paris is in arms. 
 If we knew how . to limit our desires, we should 
 spare ourselves many evils and procure ourselves a 
 great deal of good. There are some defects which 
 people carefully hide. Weakness is a defect which 
 people correct with difficulty. We learn much more 
 easily the things we understand, than those we do 
 not understand. People do not buy your book, nor 
 will they eyer buy it, 
 
 Rule 152, — Such a, or an, is expressed by TJn tel, une telle. 
 Several, by Plussieurs, 
 
 The same, by Le meme. 
 
 Every one, every body, by Chacun, or tout 
 
 le monde. 
 Each, relating to a noun plu- 
 ral, by Chacun. 
 Every, before a noun, by Chaque. 
 Most, most persons, by La plwpart. 
 Somebody, any body, by Quelquun. 
 Some or any, before a noun 
 
 plural, by Quelques. 
 
 Some or any, followed by 
 
 of, by Quelques-uns, 
 
 quelques-unes. 
 
EXERCISES. 163 
 
 Rule 153. — Chacun requires son, sa, ses, for his, her, when 
 it is placed after the object of the verb, and leur, leurs, when 
 placed before. 
 
 The same misfortunes which signalized the reign 
 of Charles the Ninth were renewed by his brother, 
 Henry the Third. Every one hopes he shall grow 
 old. Every man has his duties to fulfil. Give every 
 one his due. Those scholars have answered, each 
 according to his knowledge. Csesar and Pompey 
 possessed each their merit. You must give each 
 his share. Each blow cost him a guinea. Somebody 
 told me that you were going to be married. Do you 
 think any one believed 19 it ? I have but 149 a few 
 pence in my pocket. I know some of these rules. 
 Do you know any of these gentlemen ? 
 
 Rule 154. — Whatever, whatsoever, at the beginning of a 
 sentence, are expressed by quoi que ce soit que ; quoi que or 
 quelque chose que ; after a verb by quoi que ce soit, and when 
 the verb' is followed by a preposition, by quoi que ce soit que 
 with the subjunctive. 
 
 Whatever he is engaged in, he leaves off as soon 
 as his duty calls him. Whatever genius one may 
 have, one cannot, without application, excel in any 
 thing whatever. 
 
 Rule 155. — Whosoever is expressed by quiconque. 
 
 Nobody whatever, or any body whatever, with a 
 
 negation, is expressed by personne or qui que 
 
 ce soit. 
 Whoever, immediately before you, by qui que. 
 Nobody, no one, by personne, with ne, before 
 
 the verb. 
 Any body, by personne without ne. 
 None, not one, or any, in a doubtful sense, by 
 
 aucun. 
 
 He gives to no one whatever. I very much doubt 
 that your brother's conduct pleases any body. Who- 
 
164 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 ever you may be, you ought to be polite. No one 
 saw me, and I saw nobody. He whom nobody 
 pleases is more unhappy than he who pleases nobody. 
 There was not a person that was not angry at it. I 
 doubt whether any one knew mankind better than 
 La Bruyere. Has ever any one been more simple 
 in his narrations than La Fontaine? That house 
 will suit him better than any one. I doubt whether 
 there be any author without a fault. Out of all the 
 works in the world, there is not one without a fault. 
 I have seen none of your sisters this week. 
 
 Rule 156. — No one, is translated by nul. 
 
 No where, by nulle 'part. 
 
 Nothing, by rien with ne. 
 
 Any thing, by rien without ne. 
 
 NE. 
 
 Rule 157. — Ne is used before the verb after ni repeated; 
 be fore jamais, never, and nullement, by no means. 
 
 Rule 158.-— No, before a noun, is expressed by aucun with 
 
 ne. 
 No, in answers, by non. 
 Not, with a verb, by ne before, and pas after, 
 
 the verb. 
 Ne pas come together before an infinitive 
 
 mood. 
 Not, followed by that, is expressed by non que. 
 
 No one knows whether he be worthy of love or 
 hatred. There is nowhere so much wealth as in 
 England. Nothing is more common than the name 
 of friend. It is dangerous to undertake any thing 
 beyond one's strength. It is often better to do 
 nothing than to do unprofitable things. He would 
 neither eat nor drink. Behold the birds of heaven, 
 they neither sow nor reap. Consider the lilies of 
 
EXERCISES. 165 
 
 the fields, how they grow, they neither work nor 
 spin. Your father never speaks to me, but he says 
 that he by no means approves of your conduct to 86 
 your brother. Your threats make no impression on 
 him. I have no news to tell you. Are you married? 
 No, Sir. I am not yet twelve years old. One must 
 be very cunning not to be deceived in London. I 
 will go to London, not that I like to be there, but 
 because I have business there. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 Rule 159.— The verbs, oser, to dare ; cesser, to be continually ; 
 pouvoir, to be able; and savoir, in the conditional for pouvoir, 
 have ne, without pas. Aot to know, used doubtfully, may be 
 expressed by savoir, with ne only. 
 
 When people 9 dare not blame a wicked prince, after 
 his death, it is a sign that his successor resembles 
 him. He is continually tormenting me. I cannot 
 listen to you at present. He cannot refuse you that 
 trifle. He knows not what he ought to do. I do 
 not know whether I shall go to see you to-morrow, 
 or the day after. 
 
 Rule 160. — No more, not any more, followed by than, are 
 expressed by pas plus, with ne; when not followed by than, 
 by ne before the verb, and plus after, and, when by them- 
 selves, by pas davantage. 
 
 Rule 161. — Goutte, used with voir, to signify not at all; 
 and mot, used with dire, to signify not a word, require ne, 
 without pas. 
 
 You have no more sense than your brother. I 
 have no more money. Why do you not speak ? you 
 do not say a word. A learned man sees twice as 
 
166 EXERCISES. 
 
 much as others ; and an ignorant man does not see 
 at all, even when he thinks he sees best. 
 
 DISTINCTION BETWEEN pas AND point. 
 
 Rule 162.— Point is a stronger negative than pas; pas is 
 used when a question expresses doubt ; point, when it implies 
 certainty. Point is used when speaking of a thing that is 
 seldom done; pas, when a thing is only omitted to he done at 
 the time of speaking. Point is used without ne in elliptical 
 sentences. 
 
 All the books you see in that library are not mine. 
 None of the books you see in that library are mine. 
 Taste this pear, is it not delicious ? Have you no 
 money to lend me ? Your brother is not reading. 
 Your brother does not read, that is why he is so 
 ignorant. I thought him my friend ! but no, he 
 hates me. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 Rule 163. — Ne is used when there is no negative, in 
 English; after autre, autrement, otherwise, or different; after 
 a moins que, unless, de crainte que, de peur que, for fear or 
 lest ; and after que, used for unless, before, since, until, which 
 governs a subjunctive, in French ; and finally after que used 
 for pourquoi, why, at the beginning of a sentence. 
 
 They who speak otherwise than they think, are 
 despised. I found him of a different character than 
 he had been represented to me. I shall lose my 
 way, unless I am shown a more direct road. Go 
 and speak to your cousin immediately, for fear 
 he should go away. Follow him, lest he should lose 
 his way. I will not return this knife to you, unless 
 you tell me where you found it. You will have no 
 more money, until you behave better. I cannot 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 167 
 
 lend you any more money before you have returned 
 what you have already borrowed of me. It is six 
 years ago since I saw your father. Why do you not 
 go to see him ? Why have we not as much eager- 
 ness for virtue, as we have for pleasure ? 
 
 Rule 164. — The verb douter, used negatively, requires ne 
 after que; ne is used without pas in this idiomatical phrase. 
 N'en deplaise, if it please, or an't please. 
 
 Rule 165. — Only, followed by a substantive, is expressed 
 by seul, and when followed by a relative it governs a sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 I doubt not but reason assists us in making many 
 discoveries, but, an't please the philosophers, the 
 principal thing that it makes man discover, is his 
 blindness, his impotence, and the necessity of divine 
 revelation. 
 
 You are the only man I know in London. You 
 are the only one that says so. The verbs etre, avoir, 
 savoir, and alter, are the only verbs, of which the 
 second person of the imperative is not like the first 
 person of the present of the indicative : we say, 
 aie patience sois prudent, sache qu'il est honteux de 
 mentir, va te coucher. 
 
 For the syntax of the verb, see Rules 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 
 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 24, 25 to 44. 
 
168 EXERCISES. 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. 
 
 Those are the gentlemen with whom I travelled. 
 Rarely are philosophers poets, and more rarely are 
 poets philosophers. The wicked man suffers him- 
 self to be led into every kind of excess, by the habit 
 of never resisting his passions. I have often told 
 you, and tell you again, that, in order to be happy, 
 we should never look above, but always beneath, 
 ourselves. A very poor curate said one day to a 
 monk who was counting his money, You and I 
 should make a good friar ; you have made a vow of 
 poverty, and I keep it. That child gives me great 
 satisfaction, and rewards me for the care I take of 
 him. How many people there are without merit or 
 employment, who would not be admitted into 
 society, if their fortune did not introduce them ! 
 When our hatred is too deep, it places us beneath 
 those whom we hate. If thou hast a faithful friend, 
 try to keep him. Dost thou love peace ? never 
 speak but well of the absent. How does he, who has 
 not deserved the affection of his parents, dare to ex- 
 pect the favour of Heaven ? Has not death taken 
 men by surprise, and will not it always do so ? 
 When people give advice, why do they not give the 
 wisdom to profit by it. In the midst of so much 
 ignorance, man even adored the work of his own 
 hands ; he thought he could confine the divine spirit 
 in his statues ; and so completely did he forget that 
 God had made him, that he thought in his turn he 
 could make a God. He desires to conquer, and will. 
 Labour is necessary to man ; it makes him spend 
 moments of happiness, and procures him enjoyments 
 that cannot be appreciated. What I told you, I 
 believe, and shall believe, until you have proved to 
 
EXERCISES. 169 
 
 me the contrary. If woman makes conquests by her 
 beauty, she preserves them only by suavity of dispo- 
 sition. Are you the merchants mentioned to me ? 
 Yes, we are. Are you the lady I am seeking ? Yes, 
 I am ? Are you hunters ? Yes, we are. I was 
 indifferent (f) to you, and I see I am so still. Men 
 have a right to repel might by might only when the 
 law permits them. Self-love is captious ; it is how- 
 ever what we take for our guide. Women have little 
 imagination, their best writings are all, like them- 
 selves, pretty and short. The planets communicate 
 to us the light of the sun, and never their own. The 
 pardoning of our enemies does not consist merely in 
 not injuring them; we must, besides, love them truly, 
 and do them a kindness, if an opportunity offers. 
 When I see birds' nests formed with so much art, I 
 inquire what master has taught them mathematics 
 and architecture. The Cheltenham waters are much 
 esteemed; I am indebted to them for my health. 
 Each of us has an eye of complacency for himself. 
 We are pleased with ourselves when we have done a 
 good action. Whosoever loveth but himself is un- 
 worthy of life. No one is a prophet in his own 
 country (chez soi). He who offends truth, offends 
 God, and offends himself; for he speaks against his 
 own conscience. Happy he who lives at home, 
 making all his business consist in regulating his 
 desires. To live but for one's self, is to be already 
 dead. The wise man is master of himself. Love is 
 a fire that goes out of itself. Virtue is amiable in 
 itself. Vice is hateful in itself. A kindness carries 
 its reward along with it. All that is good in itself. 
 He has a home. It is a good thing to suffer only 
 those desires to spring up in our hearts which we 
 can satisfy, even in our bad fortune. That child is 
 more studious than children generally are at his age. 
 i 
 
170 EXERCISES. 
 
 A good and diligent child is beloved by every body. 
 Grief that is concealed is but the more fatal. For- 
 tune never appears so blind as to those to whom she 
 does no good. The pink is not so beautiful as the 
 rose. The fear of a misfortune often leads us into 
 a worse. The greatest privilege of kings is to be 
 useful to the wretched. The greatest punishment 
 of the wicked is the remorse of conscience. Gaming 
 is the father of vice. That scene is one of those 
 that were most applauded. The style of Penelon is 
 very luxuriant, fluent and smooth, but it is some- 
 times prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely elevated, 
 but it is sometimes harsh and rough. He leads a 
 sober, temperate, regular, and laborious life. There 
 are men whom we must not call good men because 
 they have performed an act of humanity. Privileged 
 cases are excepted by law. They all perished, except 
 five or six persons. They sent him a supposititious 
 person. We must be ready to serve our friends in 
 every thing, except against our conscience. Suppose 
 you have taken an oath to commit a crime, both 
 human and divine laws dispense you from keeping it. 
 Those ladies speak low. Those flowers smell nice. 
 Those persons stopped short. I take you all to wit- 
 ness. Beauty in a woman is but the magic of a 
 moment ; sense and virtue are alone made to please. 
 The husband and wife are always unhappy, when the 
 most perfect union does not exist between them. He 
 had his mouth and eyes open. She acts with charm- 
 ing nobleness and taste. Your brother and sister are 
 clever, their knowledge and modesty are uncommon. 
 A brilliant idea confused, is a diamond covered with 
 mud. Grateful persons resemble those fertile lands, 
 which give more than they receive. The good man 
 is always ready to help him who is in want. As we 
 cannot be happy without being pleased, it has been 
 
EXERCISES. 171 
 
 falsely concluded that, as soon as we were pleased, 
 we were happy. Out of a thousand inhabitants, 
 there is not one rich. Out of a hundred thousand 
 fighting men, there were but a thousand killed, and 
 five hundred wounded. Whoever writes is made to 
 put up with the shafts of malice. It is your brother and 
 your friend who are inquiring for you. Csesar and 
 Pompey had each their merit. That woman has 
 imagined that coquetry is a way to please. The rule 
 I have begun to explain is very easy. The vessels 
 which I saw being built, were going to the East In- 
 dies. I did not know that the lady I heard sing was 
 your cousin. Do you know the lady you have suf- 
 fered to pass? that lady is not so pretty as I thought. 
 We should do well, if we followed the same advice 
 we give to others. There is not one of my friends 
 that 21 is for me, or will take my part. The fruit* 
 that falls to the ground does not keep. Above all 
 things avoid law-suits ; our conscience is often inter- 
 ested in them, our health impaired, and property 
 dissipated by them. When a man is dead we think 
 little of him. He told me he would go there.f A 
 mother who has virtuous children makes them her 
 richest ornaments. Paris is a beautiful city ; I ad- 
 mire its monuments and walks. Those trees are 
 well situated, yet their fruit is not good. I received 
 your letter that you wrote to me. Keep your pro- 
 mises that you made me. My father, mother, bro- 
 ther and sisters have been exposed' to the blackest 
 calumnies. Every fruit has its peculiar flavour, a 
 triangle has its three sides, every word has its accep- 
 tation, every speech has its division, every language 
 has its syntax and its rules. Meum and tuum are 
 
 * Le fruit torribe a terre ; un arbre tomb e par terre. 
 f Y, there, is not expressed before the future or conditional 
 of the verb aller, to go. 
 
 i2 
 
172 EXERCISES. 
 
 j 
 
 the source of all divisions and quarrels. Brutes, 
 with their mere instinct, are often wiser than man, 
 with his reason. Read Homeland Virgil; they are 
 the two greatest poets of antiquity. Astronomers, 
 who pretend to know the nature of fixed stars, assure 
 us that they are so many suns. I have seen the 
 Louvre ; it is magnificent and worthy of a great na- 
 tion. Not to be 148 angry at any thing is having 
 great command over one's self. Caesar was a great 
 captain. To reward merit is to encourage it. To 
 have prosperous children is being a happy father. 
 The doing of a kindness to an honest man is obliging 
 every body. 
 
INDEX 
 
 TO THE IDIOMS. 
 
 A. 
 
 Able, to be able to Etre en Mat de 
 
 About, to be about Etre question de, s'agir de 
 
 to be about to Alley 
 
 to set about S'ij prendre 
 
 Abstain, to abstain from meat Fairs maigre 
 Abuse (to) Dire des injures a 
 
 Account, to give an account Rendre cornpte 
 Accuse, to accuse, or lay to S'en prendre a 
 Accustom, to accustom one's Se /aire 
 
 self 
 Ache, to ache, as : my head Avoir mal d, fai mat a la tete 
 
 aches 
 Acquaint (to) with Fair e part de 
 
 Acquainted, to get acquainted Faire connaissance 
 Act, to act, to personate Faire 
 
 — , to act foolishly une folie 
 
 Add, to add fuel to fire Mettre le feu anx etoupes 
 
 Affect, to affect the manners of Trancher de 
 
 Afraid, to be afraid Avoir peur 
 
 After, to take after Tenir de 
 
 Agree, to agree to whatever Passer par ou Von vent 
 
 one likes 
 
 to agree, to allow En demeurer d' accord 
 
 Agreeable, to be agreeable to I! avoir pour agreable 
 Agreed, to be agreed Etre d 'accord 
 
 Ail, to ail Avoir 
 
 Aim, to aim at, or take aim at Coucher en joue 
 Alight, to alight Mettre pied a terre 
 
 Allude, to allude to En avoir a 
 
 Amiss, to be amiss Alter mal 
 
 Angry, to be angry with En vouloir a 
 
174 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Anticipate (to), to go and Alter au-devant de 
 
 meet 
 Anxious, to be anxious about Eire en peine de 
 to appear, i. e., to Avoir Vair 
 
 look 
 Applaud (to) 
 Approve (to) 
 As (as I see, as it seems) 
 
 Ashamed, to be ashamed 
 
 to make ashamed 
 
 Ask, to ask questions 
 Attention, to pay attention 
 Avail, to avail one's self of 
 Aware, to be aware 
 Away, to take away 
 
 Applaudir a 
 Trouver bon 
 (ci ce que je vols, a ce qu'il 
 
 parait) 
 Avoir Jionte 
 Faire Jionte 
 Faire des questions a 
 Faire attention 
 Frofiter de 
 Prendre garde 
 Oter 
 
 B. 
 
 Bad, to be bad weather 
 
 too bad 
 
 Bake (to) 
 
 Bankrupt, to be a bankrupt 
 
 Be, there to be 
 
 — to be (24 years old, &c.) 
 
 — to be (followed by an 
 infin.) 
 
 — to be, (as I will be there) 
 
 — to be over with 
 
 — to be any thing but 
 
 — to be with ... as 
 
 — to be to 
 
 — to be (a father, &c., to) 
 
 — to be up to 
 
 — to be one's hobby, one's 
 chief excellence 
 
 — to be in the habit of 
 
 — to be full, or covered with 
 Bear, to bear witness to 
 to bear ill-will 
 
 Faire mauvais temps 
 
 Trop fort 
 
 Faire cuire au four 
 
 banqueroute 
 
 Y avoir 
 
 Avoir (24 ans, fyc.) 
 
 Devoir 
 
 Se trouver (as je m'y touverat) 
 
 Etre fait de 
 
 N'etre rien moins que 
 
 En 4tre de . . . comme 
 
 Faire ct 
 
 Tenir lieu de (pere, fyc.) 
 
 Etre au fait 
 
 son fort 
 
 Avoir coutume de 
 En avoir 
 
 Rendre temoignage de 
 Savoir mauvais gre 
 
INDEX. 
 
 175 
 
 Become, to become acquainted 
 
 Beg (to) n. 
 
 Begin, to begin to 
 
 Believe (to) 
 
 Belong, to belong to 
 
 Benumbed, to be benumbed 
 
 Better, to be or to have better 
 
 Bid, to bid good-bye 
 
 Birth, to give birth to 
 
 to owe one's birth to 
 
 Bleed (to), (as my nose 
 bleeds) 
 
 Blind (to), meaning to de- 
 ceive 
 
 Boil (to) 
 
 Bolt (to) 
 
 Bound, to be bound for (sea 
 term) 
 
 Box (to) 
 
 Break, to break out (speak- 
 ing of fire) 
 
 Bridle (to) 
 
 Bring, to bring up to, to 
 train 
 
 to bring ill-luck 
 
 to bring good-luck 
 
 Burst, to burst out a-laugh- 
 ing 
 
 But, any thing but 
 
 Faire connaissance 
 
 JDemander Vaumone 
 
 Se mettre a 
 
 Aj outer foi a 
 
 Etrea 
 
 Ne se sentir pas defroid 
 
 Valoir mieux 
 
 Dire adieu 
 
 Mettre au monde 
 
 Devoir le jour ct 
 
 Saigner de (as je saigne die 
 
 nez) 
 Jeta de la poadre aux yeux de 
 
 Faire bouillir 
 Fermer au verrou 
 Alter a 
 
 Se battre d, coups-de-poing 
 Prendre cl 
 
 Mettre unfrein ci 
 Dresser a 
 
 Porter mallieur 
 Porter honheur 
 Faire un eclat de rire 
 
 Care, to take care 
 to take care not to 
 
 to care about 
 
 Careful, to be over-careful 
 
 of one's self 
 Catch, to catch at it 
 
 to catch it 
 
 Cheap 
 
 Avoir soin 
 
 N' avoir garde de, or se gar- 
 
 der bien de 
 Se soucier de, s'embarrasser 
 
 de, se mettre en peine de 
 S'tcouter 
 
 Y prendre 
 
 En avoir 
 
 A bon marche 
 
176 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Clap, to clap hands 
 Clear, to clear away- 
 Clever, to be clever at 
 Cloth, to lay the cloth 
 Clover, to live in clover 
 Cold, to be cold 
 
 to be cold weather 
 
 Collusion, to be in collusion 
 
 with 
 Colours, to strike colours 
 Come, a thought comes into 
 my head 
 
 to come to acts of 
 
 violence 
 
 to come to (a person) 
 
 Comfortable (to be) 
 Compassion, to excite the 
 
 compassion of 
 Complete (to) 
 Conceited (to be) 
 Concerned, to be concerned, 
 
 or at stake 
 Confine, to confine one's 
 
 self to 
 Consequence (to be of) to 
 Conversation (to turn the) 
 
 — — , to enter into 
 
 conversation 
 Cook (to) neuter 
 Coolly, to receive coolly 
 Counterfeit (to) 
 Courage, to have courage 
 Court (to), to pay one's ad- 
 dresses to 
 Crown, to crown, to com- 
 plete 
 
 Dark, to be dark 
 Daylight, to be daylight 
 Deal, to deal (cards) 
 
 Battre des mains 
 
 Desservir 
 
 Mre fort sur 
 
 Mettre la nappe, or le convert 
 
 Vivre comme un coq en pdte 
 
 Avoir froid 
 
 Fairs froid 
 
 8' entendre avec, dtre-dHntelli- 
 
 gence avec 
 Baisser pavilion 
 II me vient une pensie 
 
 En venir aux mains 
 
 Venir trouver 
 Se trouver Men 
 Faire pitie a 
 
 Mettre le comble d, 
 8' en faire accroire 
 II y va de 
 
 8'en tenir a 
 
 Importer de 
 
 Faire tomber la conversation 
 
 Lier conversation 
 
 Faire la cuisine 
 Battre froid cl 
 Faire 
 
 Avoir du cceur 
 Faire la cour a 
 
 Mettre le comble & 
 
 D. 
 
 Faire nuit 
 
 jour 
 
 (les cartes) or donner 
 
INDEX. 177 
 
 Deal, to have to deal with Avoir affaire a 
 Death, to put to death Faire mourir 
 Deceive (to), by false tales En faire accroire & 
 Deficient, to be deficient in II manque cL 
 Delight, to be the delight of Faire les delices de 
 Deliver, to deliver (a letter, tenir [une lettre, Src) 
 
 &c.) 
 Depend, to depend upon 8e reposer sur 
 Deprive, to deprive one's "\ 
 
 self of \ S'oter 
 
 to get out of the way ) t 
 
 to deprive of Oter a 
 
 Desire, to have a desire to Avoir envie de 
 
 to desire ardently Mourir d' envie de 
 
 Difficulty, to have a difficulty Avoir de la peine 
 Dirty, to be dirty (weather) Faire sale 
 Distrust (to) Se defter de 
 
 Do, to have to do with Avoir de commun avec 
 
 — to do without Se passer de 
 
 — to do nothing but Ne faire que 
 
 — to do with Tirer parti de 
 
 — that will not do A d'autres 
 
 — to do for, i. e.y instead Tenir lieu de 
 Draw, to draw upon one's S'attirer 
 
 self 
 
 Dress (to), one's self Faire sa toilette 
 
 Drive, to drive out or expel Chasser 
 
 to drive over Passer sur 
 
 Dry, to be dry, i.e., thirsty Avoir soif 
 
 Duty, to be the duty to Etre a 
 
 Dwell, to dwell upon one's Tenir au cosur 
 
 mind 
 
 E. 
 
 Eat, to eat meat Faire gras 
 
 Emulation (with) A Venvi, a qui mieux mieux 
 
 Enable (to) Mettre enitatde 
 
 Enter, to enter into conver- Lier conversation 
 sation 
 
 i5 
 
178 INDEX. 
 
 Envy (to) Porter envie a 
 
 to excite envy Faire envie H 
 
 Escape, to escape from S y echapper de 
 
 to escape (dangers, Echapper a (aux perils, §*c.) 
 
 &c.) 
 ■ to escape Se sauver 
 to have a narrow es- I? echapper belle 
 
 cape 
 Esteem (to) Faire cas de 
 
 Evince (to) paraitre 
 
 Excite, to excite envy 
 
 to excite or strike liorreur 
 
 with horror 
 
 — to excite the com pHie* v 
 
 passion of 
 
 Exhausted (to be) N' en pouvoir plus 
 Expect (to) S'attendre a 
 Expense (to be at) Faire des depenses 
 to be at the expense lesfrais de 
 
 of 
 
 F. 
 
 Face (to) Faire face a 
 
 Fade (to), spoil Se passer 
 
 Fall, to fall into (a snare, &c.) Donner dans 
 
 to fall out with Se brouiller avec 
 
 to fall to the lot of Tomher en partage a 
 
 to fall upon (victuals, Donner stir 
 
 &c.) 
 
 to fall upon and de- Faire main basse sur 
 
 stroy, or carry away 
 Far, to be far from Senfaillir que 
 Fault, to be the fault of if Ne tenir qu'ci 
 Find, to find fault with Trouver a redire a 
 to find it worth one's Y trouver son compte 
 
 while 
 
 Fine, to be fine (weather) Faire beau 
 
 to be fine again Se remettre au beau 
 
 (to) Condamner a V amende 
 
INDEX. 179 
 
 Fire, to fire at or on Hirer sur 
 
 to set fire to Mettre le feu a 
 
 Firm, to be firm Tenir bon 
 
 Fish, to drink like a fish JBoire comme une eponge 
 
 Foggy, to be foggy Faire du brouillard 
 
 Forbid, God forbid A Lieu ne plane 
 
 Forgive (to), a thing Pardonner {tine chose) 
 
 (to) a person Pardonner a {une persomie) 
 
 Friends (to), be friends again Se remettre avec 
 Frighten (to) Faire jpeur a 
 
 Fry (to) frire 
 
 Full (to be), to repletion En avoir 
 
 G. 
 Game, to make game of Se jour de 
 Get, to get or have (done) 
 
 or any other expression Faire 
 
 signifying to cause 
 
 — to get rid of Se defaire de, se debarrasser 
 
 de 
 
 — to get out of trouble Se tirer d' affaire 
 
 — to get out of a scrape d'embarras 
 
 — to get into bed Se mettre au lit 
 
 — to get or procure for Fair avoir a 
 
 — to get into trouble Se faire des affaires 
 
 — to get safe out of a bad Tirer son epingle du jeu 
 business 
 
 — to get acquainted Faire connaissance 
 Give, to give up Se rendre 
 
 to give way to or up to — laisser alter a 
 
 to give it En donner 
 
 to give satisfaction Faire raison 
 
 to give an account Rendre compte 
 
 to give reason Donner lieu or sujet 
 
 Glory, to glory in Se faire gloire ou lionneur de 
 
 Go, to go (to a place) — rendre a {tin endroit) 
 
 — to go (a mile, &c.) Faire (un mille, fyc.) 
 
 — to go without Se passer de 
 
 — to go to see, or to go to Alter trouver (une persomie) 
 (a person) 
 
180 INDEX. 
 
 Go, to go and meet Alter au-devant de 
 
 — to go on one's own way son train 
 
 — to go to bed se coucher 
 
 — to go to war Faire la guerre 
 Granted, (to take for) Tenir pour assure 
 
 granted or I grant it I)' accord ou fen demeure d* 
 
 accord 
 H. 
 Habit, to be in the habit of Avoir coutume de 
 
 Hand, to have a hand in part a 
 
 Hardly, I can hardly J'ai de la peine a 
 
 Have, to have it or hit it Y 4tre 
 
 to have reason to Avoir sujet de 
 
 to have a mind to envie de 
 
 to have to do with, affaire a 
 
 i.e., to deal with 
 to have, signifying to Faire 
 
 cause 
 
 to have just Venir de 
 
 to have left II me reste 
 
 — to have but just Ne faire que de 
 
 to have a spite against Fn vouloir a 
 
 to have no occasion for N* avoir que faire de 
 
 to have a hand in Avoir part a 
 
 to have in one's head S'aviser de 
 
 to have on one's hands Avoir sur les bras 
 
 to have at one's dis en main 
 
 posal 
 
 ■ to have like to Penser 
 
 to have an intention to Avoir dessein de 
 
 to have to do with de commun avec 
 
 to have a pain in mal a 
 
 Happen (to), as if you hap- Venir a (si vous venez a le 
 
 pen to do so faire) 
 
 Head, to knock one's head Bonner de la tete contre 
 
 against 
 
 Heady, to be heady a la tete 
 
 Hear, to hear from Recevoir or avoir des nouvel- 
 
 les de 
 
INDEX. 181 
 
 Hear, to hear of Apprendre 
 
 Heart (to have at) Avoir a cceur 
 
 Help, I cannot help it Je n't/ puis que /aire 
 
 Hit, to hit it Y tire 
 
 Hobby, to be one's hobby Eire son fort 
 
 Hot, to be hot, i. e., to feel Avoir chaud 
 so 
 
 ; to be hot (weather) Faire chaud 
 
 Hungry (to be) Avoir f aim 
 Hurt (to), give pain to Faire mat a 
 — (to) as it hurts me to de la peine de 
 
 I. 
 
 Idle talk, Des contes, des contes en Vair 
 
 If . . . but a little Four peu que 
 
 111, to take ill or amiss Trouver mauvais 
 
 Imitate (to), a person Rendre 
 
 Impose, to impose on by En faire accroirea 
 
 stories 
 
 Inclined (to be) Etreporte a 
 
 ■ (to feel) Le cceur nCen dit 
 
 Incur (to) S'attirer 
 
 Induce, to induce to Forter a 
 
 Indulge, to indulge one's self S'en donner 
 
 Intend (to) Avoir dessein 
 
 Interrupt (to) Couper la parole a 
 
 J. 
 
 Join, to join the sport Se mettre de la partie 
 
 — to join, to unite one's — joindre a 
 
 self with 
 Joke, to take a joke Entendre raillerie 
 
 Judge, to be a judge of Se connaitre a 
 
 Just, to have just Venir de 
 
 to have but just Ne faire que de 
 
 to be just the thing Eire son affaire 
 
 K. 
 
 Keep, to keep to S f en tenir a 
 
 Kick (to) Donner des coups-de-pied 
 
182 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Kindness, to do a kindness Faire plaisir a, faire des ami- 
 
 to 
 Know, to let know 
 
 to know how 
 not to know 
 
 to know 
 
 ties a 
 connaitre, faire savoir, 
 
 /aire dire a 
 Savoir 
 Ignorer 
 Ne pas ignorer 
 
 Lay, to lay to 
 
 to lay a wager 
 
 to lay under contribu- 
 tion 
 
 to lay the cloth 
 
 to lay (a wager) 
 
 Laugh, to laugh in one's face Mre an nez a 
 
 S'en prendre a 
 Faire unpari 
 — — contribuer 
 
 Mettre la nappe or le convert 
 Gager,parier 
 
 Leave, to leave to 
 
 ■ with your leave 
 Left, I have left 
 Lent, to keep lent 
 Let, to let know 
 
 ■ to let see 
 Light, to be light 
 Like, to be, if one likes 
 Likely, to be likely to 
 Live, to live well 
 
 to live ill 
 
 Load, to load with 
 Lock (to) 
 Long, to long 
 
 to be long before 
 
 Look, to look (ill, &c.) 
 
 to look well 
 
 to look sulky 
 
 to look into 
 
 to look as if, or to be 
 
 likely to 
 Lot, to fall to the lot of 
 
 S'en remettre a, ien rapporter 
 
 a, se reposer sur 
 Ne vous en deplaise 
 II me reste 
 Faire careme 
 
 savoir a 
 
 voir ci 
 
 Ne tenir qu'a 
 Avoir Fair de 
 Faire bonne chere 
 
 mauvaise chere 
 
 Combler de 
 
 Fermer a la clef ,; 
 
 II m-e tarde de 
 
 Tarder a 
 
 Avoir Vair (malade, fyc.) 
 
 Faire la mine 
 Bonner sur 
 Avoir Vair de 
 
 Tomber en partage d, 
 echoir c, 
 
 or 
 
IXDEX. 
 
 183 
 
 Luck, to bring good-luck Porter honheur 
 
 to bring ill-luck malheur 
 
 Lurch, to leave in the lurch Planter la. 
 
 M. 
 
 Made, to get or have made Fair ef aire 
 
 Make, to make ashamed Jwnte a 
 
 to make the most of valoir 
 
 to make faces la grimace 
 
 to make one's self mas- Se rendre maitre de 
 
 ter of 
 
 to make game of Se jouer de 
 
 Manage, to manage so that Faire que 
 Matter, to be the matter with Avoir 
 
 to be the matter S'agir de 
 
 Mean (to) Vouloir dire 
 
 Meat, to eat meat Faire gras 
 
 Meet, to go and meet Alter au-devant de 
 
 Merely Ne faire que 
 
 Mind, to dwell upon one's Tenir au cosur a 
 
 mind 
 
 to have a mind to Avoir envie de 
 
 to make up one's mind Prendre son parti 
 
 (to) Tenir compte 
 
 Mistrust (to) Se mefier de 
 
 Mouth, to make one's mouth Faire venir Veau a la louche a 
 
 water 
 
 Muddy, to be Faire crotte 
 
 N. 
 
 Name (my name is) Je me nomme 
 
 Nearly Peu s* enfant que 
 
 Need, to stand in need of 1 A . , . 7 
 , i > Avoir besom de 
 
 Nevertheless, to (think, &c.) Ne laisser pas de (croire, fyc.) 
 nevertheless 
 
 0. 
 
 Objection, to have no objec- Ne demander pas mieux que de 
 tion to 
 
184 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Oblige (to) Faire plaisir a 
 Occasion, to give occasion Bonner lieu or sujet 
 to have no occasion N' avoir que faire de 
 
 for 
 Obliged, to be obliged to Savoir bon gre a 
 Offence, to take offence at, or Prendre en mauvaise part 
 
 to be offended at 
 Only Ne faire que 
 
 Over, to be all over with Mrefait de 
 
 P. 
 
 Plier bagage 
 
 Avoir mat a 
 
 Pardonner a une personne 
 
 Avoir part a 
 
 Regarder de pres 
 
 Faire attention 
 
 une visite 
 
 Pack, to pack off 
 Pain, to have a pain in 
 Pardon (to), a person 
 Part, to take part in 
 Particular (to be) 
 Pay, to pay attention 
 
 to pay a visit 
 
 Pity (to) 
 
 to excite pity 
 
 Place, to be the place to 
 Plainly 
 
 Play, to play on 
 
 Please (to) 
 
 Pledge, to pledge, to pawn 
 
 Possible, how is it possible to 
 
 Possibility, there is no possi- 
 bility to 
 
 Praise (to) 
 
 Prejudiced (to be) 
 
 Present, to make a present 
 
 Presume (to) 
 
 Pretend (to) 
 
 to pretend to be 
 
 Prize (to) 
 
 Produce (to) 
 
 Proof, to be proof against 
 
 Profit, to profit by 
 
 Proper, to think proper 
 
 Avoir pitie de 
 
 Faire pitie 
 
 Etre a 
 
 En bon Francais 
 
 Jouer de 
 
 Faire plaisir a 
 
 Mettre en gage 
 
 Le moyen de 
 
 II n'y a pas moyen de 
 
 Faire Veloge de 
 Avoir des prejuges 
 Faire cadeau de 
 Se faire fort de 
 Faire semblant de 
 Faire 
 
 - cas de 
 
 naitre 
 
 Etre a Vepremc ( 
 Mettre a profit 
 Trouver bon, 
 
INDEX. 
 
 185 
 
 Prosecute (to) 
 
 Pump (to) 
 
 Pursue, to pursue a conduct 
 
 Put, to put up with 
 
 to put up with, to bear 
 
 to put to death 
 
 to put off 
 
 to put an end to 
 
 to put or get through 
 
 to put in (a word) 
 
 to put up to 
 
 to put on a wrong scent 
 
 to put to the sword 
 
 to put in mind 
 
 Faire son proces a 
 
 Tire?' les vers du nez a 
 
 Tenir une conduite 
 
 Se c out enter de 
 
 Essuyer 
 
 Faire mourir 
 
 Remettre 
 
 Faire cesser 
 
 Passer 
 
 Placer fun mot) 
 
 Mettre an fait 
 
 en defaut 
 
 Eainy, to be rainy (weather) 
 Rather, to have rather 
 Reason, to have reason to 
 
 to give reason 
 
 Reasonable (to be) 
 
 Receive, io receive (money) 
 
 Reflect (to) 
 
 Eelate (to) 
 
 Eely, to rely on 
 
 Eepair to repair to 
 
 Eeproach (to) 
 
 Eespect (to), impersonal 
 
 Return, to return home 
 
 Rid, to yet rid of 
 
 Right (to be) 
 
 to have a right 
 
 Rise, to rise from meals 
 
 to give rise to 
 
 Roast, to roast 
 Roll, to roll in 
 
 Passer an fit de Vepee 
 Rappeler 
 
 R. 
 
 Faire pluvieux 
 
 Aimer mieux 
 Avoir lieu or sujet de 
 Do nner lieu or sujet de 
 Entendre raison, 
 Toucher (de V argent J 
 Faire reflex-ion 
 
 le-recit de 
 
 fond sur 
 
 Se rendre a 
 
 Faire des reproches a 
 
 S'agir de, etre question de 
 
 Rentrer 
 
 Se defaire de 
 
 Avoir raison 
 
 le droit 
 
 Se lever de table 
 Faire naitre 
 
 rotir 
 
 Router sur 
 
 Sail, to set sail Faire voile, mettre a la voile 
 
 Satisfied, to be satisfied with Se contenter de 
 
186 INDEX. 
 
 Satisfaction, to take satisfac- Tirer raison de 
 
 tion for 
 to give satis- Faire raison 
 
 faction 
 Save, to save the life of Sauver la vie a 
 Scarcely, I can scarcely J'ai de la peine a 
 
 Scrape, to get out of a scrape Se tirer d'embarras 
 Scruple (to) — faire scrupule de 
 
 See, to go to see Alter trouver 
 
 — r- not to see at a Ne voir goutte 
 
 to let see Faire voir a 
 
 Seize, to seize on (a military Se rendre maiire de 
 
 term) 
 
 to seize on 
 
 Se saisir de 
 
 Send, to send for 
 
 Faire venir 
 
 to send word 
 
 dire 
 
 Serve, to serve as or for 
 
 Servir de 
 
 (to) 
 
 Rendre service a 
 
 Set, to set up for 
 
 Faire 
 
 to set value on 
 
 cas de 
 
 to set sail 
 
 voile, mettre a la voile 
 
 — « — to set (out on a journey) Se mettre en route 
 
 to set up again 
 
 Remettre sur pied 
 
 to set about 
 
 S'y prendre 
 
 to set fire to 
 
 Mettre le feu a 
 
 Shake, to shake off Se defaire de 
 
 Shame (to) Faire honte a 
 
 Share (to) Prendre part, avoir part a 
 
 Shave (to), one's self Se faire la barbe 
 
 Shelter (to) Mettre a couvert or a Vabri 
 
 Shipwrecked (to be) Faire naufrage 
 
 Show (to) voir 
 
 Simple (to be) Ftre bon 
 
 Sink (to) Couler a fond 
 Sit, to sit down to meals Se mettre a table 
 Situation, to be out of a si- Ftre sur le pave* 
 
 tuation 
 
 Stake, to be at Y oiler (imp.) 
 
 Stand, to stand firm Tenir bon 
 
 to stand Ftre debout 
 
 Stick, to stick to S'en tenir a 
 
INDEX. 187 
 
 Strike, to strike against 
 
 Donner contre 
 
 — — — a thought strikes me 
 
 II me vient une pensee 
 
 Succeed (to) 
 
 En venir a bout 
 
 Sulky, to look sulky 
 
 Faire la mine 
 
 Sunny, to be sunny 
 
 du soleil 
 
 Suspect (to) 
 
 Se douter de 
 
 Sustain, to sustain a loss 
 
 Faire une perte 
 
 Swift, as swift as an arrow 
 
 Comme un eclair 
 T. 
 
 Oter 
 
 Take, to take away ) 
 to take off / 
 
 to take care not to 
 
 N* avoir garde de, or se garder 
 
 
 Men de 
 
 to take care of 
 
 Avoir soin de 
 
 to take into one's head S'aviser 
 
 to take from 
 
 Fnlever a 
 
 to take after 
 
 Tenir de 
 
 to take amiss or ill 
 
 Trouver mauvais 
 
 to take satisfaction 
 
 Tirer raison 
 
 to take up 
 
 Faire saisir 
 
 to take offence at 
 
 Prendre en mauvaise part 
 
 to take out (a stain, &c.) Faire en alter 
 
 to take care, i.e., to be 
 
 - Prendre garde 
 
 ware 
 
 
 to take a walk 
 
 Faire un tour 
 
 to take a joke 
 
 Entendre raillerie 
 
 Tell, to teU fibs 
 
 En conter 
 
 Testimony (to bear) 
 
 Rendre temoignage de 
 
 Thank (to) 
 
 graces a 
 
 There, there to be 
 
 Y avoir 
 
 Thirsty (to be) 
 
 Avoir soif 
 
 Train (to) 
 
 Dresser a 
 
 Treat (to), to use ill or well 
 
 En user avec 
 
 to treat with kindness 
 
 Faire des amities a 
 
 Trouble, to get out of trouble Se tirer d'affaires 
 
 to get into trouble 
 
 — faire des affaires 
 
 to trouble one's self — mettre en peine de 
 
 about 
 
 
 Trust (to) 
 
 ■ — fier a 
 
 Turn, to turn (soldier, &c.) 
 
 — faire 
 
188 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Turn, to turn out of doors Chasser or mettre a la ports 
 — to turn the conversation Faire. tomber la conversation 
 
 U. 
 Unanimously D'une commune voix 
 
 Understand, to understand S' entendre a 
 
 how to 
 Use, to be of no use Ne servir de rien 
 
 V. 
 Vain, it is in vain for me to J'ai beau 
 Value (to), or set value on Faire cas de 
 
 Vex (to) du depit a 
 
 W. 
 Walk, to take a walk Faire un tour 
 
 Want (to), to stand in need Avoir besoin de 
 
 of 
 
 (to) to be deficient in II manque a 
 
 to want with (a person) Vouloir a 
 
 to want with (a thing) de 
 
 Warm (to be or feel) Avoir chaud 
 
 to be warm weather Faire chaud 
 
 Wash (to), neuter Faire la lessive 
 
 Water (to make one's mouth) venir Veaa a la boucJie 
 
 Way, to give way to Se laisser alter a 
 
 to go on one's own way Alter son train 
 
 to get out of the way S'dter 
 
 "W ar (to) Porter 
 
 Well (to be) Se porter bien 
 
 Wet (to be) Faire humide 
 
 Word, to send word dire, mander 
 
 — — to go from one's word Manquer de parole a 
 
 with r± 
 
 While, to find it worth one's Y trouver son compte 
 
 while 
 Whisper (to) Farler a Voreille, dire a Vo- 
 
 reille 
 Wish (to), very much to Mourir oVenvie de 
 Word, to send word Faire dire a 
 
 Wrong, to be wrong Avoir tort 
 
 ■ to wrong Faire tort a 
 
 Printed by Richard Kinder, Green Arbour Court, Old Bailey. 
 

mm 
 
 
 
Jl... 
 
 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 003 122 479 2